MAEN831H, 2012-10

iX Developer

Reference Manual

English

Foreword

Reference manual for iX Developer

Foreword

The iX Developer software is used to configure Operator panels and PC operated control applications, including applications for IPCs (Industrial PCs).

The iX Developer makes it easy to create logical, flexible and effective HMI applications that provide the right information on the right occasion to operators and to other systems.

This manual describes the configuration software in detail.

Please see the iX Developer User’s Guide (MAEN832x) for function-based descriptions.

The manual assumes that the most recent versions of the system program (image) and iX Developer are used.

For specific details of a connected controller refer to the help file for the controller driver. The function of a project application in an operator panel is not affected by the choice of controller.

The information in this manual is also available by pressing F1 while using iX

Developer.

The present revision of this manual is valid for version 2.0 of iX Developer.

Order no: MAEN831H

Copyright © 2012-10 Beijer Electronics AB. All rights reserved.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and is provided as available at the time of printing. Beijer Electronics AB reserves the right to change any information without updating this publication. Beijer Electronics AB assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.

All examples in this document are only intended to improve understanding of the functionality and handling of the equipment. Beijer Electronics AB cannot assume any liability if these examples are used in real applications.

In view of the wide range of applications for this software, users must acquire sufficient knowledge themselves in order to ensure that it is correctly used in their specific application. Persons responsible for the application and the equipment must themselves ensure that each application is in compliance with all relevant requirements, standards, and legislation in respect to configuration and safety. Beijer Electronics AB will accept no liability for any damage incurred during the installation or use of equipment mentioned in this document. Beijer Electronics AB prohibits all modification, changes, or conversion of the equipment.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

Contents

Contents

1 The Configuration Tool ................................................ 11

1.1

Introduction ..................................................... 11

1.1.1

Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

1.1.2

1.1.3

1.1.4

1.1.5

1.1.6

Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

System Requirements and Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

1.1.7

File Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

2 Working with Projects .................................................. 18

2.1

Creating a Project ................................................ 19

2.1.1

Connecting to a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.1.2

2.3.1

2.3.2

Designing a Screen Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

2.1.3

Designing Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Importing an Information Designer Project ................... 22

Importing an H-Designer/ADP Project ........................ 23

Exporting the H-Designer/ADP Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Importing the a2i File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

2.3.3

Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Optimizing Performance ........................................ 27

2.4.1

Communication Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

2.5

2.6

2.4.2

Communication Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

2.4.3

Performance in the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Maneuvering Objects with the Touch Screen .................. 31

2.5.1

Operate Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Peripherals ........................................................ 32

2.6.1

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

2.6.2

Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

2.6.3

Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

3 Development Environment ............................................ 33

3.1

Starting iX Developer ............................................ 33

3.1.1

Creating a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

3.1.2

3.1.3

3.1.4

3.1.5

Opening a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Getting Familiar with iX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Starting iX Developer from the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

3.2

3.1.6

3.1.7

Quick Access Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Ribbon Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

3.1.8

Additional Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Desktop Area ..................................................... 51

3.2.1

3.2.2

3.2.3

3.2.4

Screen View in Desktop Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Desktop View Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Positioning Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

Configuration Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

Contents

3.3

Screens ............................................................ 64

3.3.1

Screen Name and Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

3.3.2

3.3.3

3.3.4

3.3.5

Background Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Startup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Screen Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Screen Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

3.3.6

3.3.7

Popup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

Preloading Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

3.4

3.5

3.6

3.7

3.3.8

3.5.2

3.5.3

Importing Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

3.3.9

Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Objects ........................................................... 71

3.4.1

Handling Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Navigation Manager ............................................. 76

3.5.1

Screen Relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

Add Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Links in the Navigation Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

3.5.4

Navigation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Project Explorer .................................................. 78

3.6.1

Project Explorer Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Component Library ............................................. 85

3.7.1

3.7.2

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Add and Use Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

3.8

3.7.3

Component Library Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Property Grid .................................................... 90

3.9

3.10

3.8.1

Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Object Browser ................................................... 91

Output ........................................................... 91

3.11

3.12

Error List ......................................................... 92

Help .............................................................. 92

4 Tags ....................................................................... 93

4.1

Adding Tags ...................................................... 93

4.1.1

4.1.2

4.1.3

4.1.4

4.1.5

Basic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Data Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Adding Tags during Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

4.2

4.3

4.4

4.5

4.6

4.7

4.8

4.1.6

Selecting Multiple Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Tag Actions ....................................................... 98

Internal Tags ..................................................... 99

System Tags ...................................................... 100

Array Tags ........................................................ 102

4.5.1

Array Tag Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Cross Reference .................................................. 104

Triggers ........................................................... 105

Poll Groups ....................................................... 106

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

Contents

4.9

4.10

4.11

4.12

4.13

Station Handling ................................................ 107

Index Registers ................................................... 109

4.10.1

Index Addressing Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

4.10.2

Using Index Registers for Station Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

Expressions ....................................................... 116

4.11.1

4.11.2

4.11.3

Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

Using Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Library Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

4.11.4

Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Data Exchange ................................................... 119

Importing and Exporting Tags .................................. 123

4.13.1

Handling Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

4.14

4.15

4.16

4.13.2

4.13.3

Saving the Import Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Tag Import Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

4.13.4

Importing Tags from the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

Filtering Tags ..................................................... 129

Tag Format ....................................................... 130

Aliases ............................................................. 132

4.16.1

Creating Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

4.16.2

Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

5 Controller ................................................................ 136

5.1

Adding a Controller ............................................. 137

5.2

5.3

5.1.1

Notify Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

DEMO Controller .............................................. 139

External OPC Server ............................................ 140

5.4

5.3.1

OPC Classic Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

5.3.2

OPC UA Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

Updating Drivers ................................................ 144

5.4.1

Updating Drivers from Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

5.4.2

Updating Drivers from File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

5.5

Synchronizing the Controller Clock ............................ 146

6 Web Server ............................................................... 147

6.1

Web Server Configuration ...................................... 147

6.1.1

Web Site Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

6.2

6.3

6.1.2

Login Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

Javascript SDK ................................................... 149

6.2.1

Javascript SDK Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

Web Service API ................................................. 161

6.3.1

RESTful Web Service API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

6.3.2

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

6.3.3

REST API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162

7 Objects ................................................................... 165

7.1

Blinking Objects ................................................. 167

7.2

7.3

7.1.1

Limitations for Operator Panel Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168

Shapes ............................................................ 169

HMI Controls ................................................... 170

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

Contents

7.4

7.5

7.6

7.7

7.8

7.9

7.3.1

7.3.2

7.3.3

7.3.4

7.3.5

7.3.6

7.3.7

7.3.8

7.3.9

7.3.10

7.3.11

7.3.12

7.3.13

Action Menu Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Alarm Viewer Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

Analog Numeric Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

Animated GIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

Animated Label Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

Audit Trail Viewer Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

Button Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180

Circular Meter Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

Chart Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186

Database Viewer Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

Digital Clock Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

Linear Meter Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

Multi Picture Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193

7.3.14

7.3.15

7.3.16

7.3.17

7.3.18

7.3.19

Picture Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194

Roller Panel Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

Slider Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

Text Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

Touch Combo Box Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199

Touch List Box Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

7.3.20

Trend Viewer Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201

Media Controls .................................................. 202

7.4.1

Media Player Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

7.4.2

PDF Viewer Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

7.4.3

Web Browser Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

Special Controls .................................................. 208

7.5.1

Navigation List Box Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209

7.5.2

Screen Carousel Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211

Debug Tools ...................................................... 213

7.6.1

Alarm Distributor Viewer Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214

Windows Controls ............................................... 215

7.7.1

Check Box Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

7.7.2

7.7.3

7.7.4

7.7.5

7.7.6

Combo Box Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217

Group Box Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219

List Box Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

Progress Bar Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221

Radio Button Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

7.7.7

Text Box Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

Additional Controls ............................................. 225

7.8.1

Target Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

7.8.2

Adding Controls to the iX Developer Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227

7.8.3

Default Controls and Installed Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

WPF Controls ................................................... 229

7.9.1

WPF User Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229

7.9.2

7.9.3

WPF Custom Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229

Creating a WPF User Control with Tag Connection . . . . . . . . . . . .230

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

Contents

7.9.4

Creating a Windows Forms User Control for a PC Target . . . . . .232

7.9.5

Creating a Windows Forms User Control for a CE Target . . . . . .235

8 Ribbon Tabs ............................................................. 237

8.1

Home Ribbon Tab ............................................... 238

8.1.1

Clipboard Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239

8.1.2

8.1.3

8.1.4

8.1.5

8.1.6

Screen Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240

Objects Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241

Font Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241

Format Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242

Tag/Security Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248

8.2

8.3

8.4

8.5

8.6

8.7

8.8

8.1.7

Name Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249

Project Ribbon Tab .............................................. 250

8.2.1

Run Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251

8.2.2

Transfer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253

8.2.3

Project Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259

System Ribbon Tab .............................................. 272

8.3.1

8.3.2

8.3.3

8.3.4

8.3.5

8.3.6

Time Zone and Region Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273

Buzzer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273

Backlight Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274

Serial Ports Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274

Servers Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275

Output Devices Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279

8.3.7

Service Menu Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284

Insert Ribbon Tab ................................................ 285

8.4.1

Functions Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286

View Ribbon Tab ................................................ 287

8.5.1

Windows Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288

Dynamics Ribbon Tab ........................................... 289

8.6.1

Layout Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290

8.6.2

8.8.2

8.8.3

Color Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293

8.6.3

General Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294

General Ribbon Tab ............................................. 304

Actions Ribbon Tab .............................................. 305

8.8.1

Click Action Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306

Mouse Button Action Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306

Function Key Action Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306

8.8.4

8.8.5

8.8.6

8.8.7

8.8.8

8.8.9

Value Changed Action Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306

Focus Action Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306

Navigation Action Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307

Data Logger Action Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307

Alarm Server Action Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307

Action Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308

8.8.10

Multiple Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312

9 Trend Viewer ............................................................ 313

9.1

Defining Trend Viewer Objects ................................. 313

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

Contents

10.2

9.1.1

Adding a Trend Viewer Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314

9.1.2

Trend Viewer Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317

9.2

Historical Mode in Trend Viewer ............................... 318

10 Data Logger .............................................................. 319

10.1

Data Logging Strategies ......................................... 319

10.1.1

Logging Based on Time Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319

10.1.2

Logging Based on Changed Tag Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319

Adding a Data Logger ........................................... 320

10.2.1

General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322

10.2.2

Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322

11 Scheduler ................................................................ 323

11.1

Scheduler Set Up ................................................. 323

11.1.1

Adding a Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323

12 Reports ................................................................... 324

12.1

Reports Template Set up ......................................... 324

12.1.1

Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324

12.2

12.1.2

Database Driven Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325

Reports Set Up ................................................... 326

12.3

Adding a Report .................................................. 327

13 Recipe Management .................................................... 328

13.1

Recipe Setup ..................................................... 329

13.2

13.3

13.1.1

Adding a Recipe Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329

Recipes in the Operator Panel ................................... 331

13.2.1

13.2.2

13.2.3

Loading Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331

Saving Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331

Creating Recipes in the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331

13.2.4

Editing Recipes Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332

Recipe Export .................................................... 333

13.3.1

Recipe Export from an Operator Panel Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334

13.4

13.3.2

Recipe Export from a PC Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335

Recipe Import .................................................... 336

13.4.1

Recipe Import to an Operator Panel Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337

13.4.2

Recipe Import to a PC Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338

14 Function Keys ........................................................... 339

14.1

Definitions ....................................................... 339

14.2

14.1.1

Keyboard Operated Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340

Configuring Function Keys ..................................... 341

14.2.1

Function Key Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341

14.2.2

Function Key Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343

15 Alarm Management ..................................................... 344

15.1

15.2

Alarm Conditions ................................................ 344

Alarm Server ...................................................... 345

15.2.1

15.2.2

General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345

Alarm Server Events and Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346

15.3

15.2.3

Alarm Distribution Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349

Alarm Indicator .................................................. 350

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

Contents

15.4

15.5

15.6

15.7

Alarm Items ...................................................... 351

15.4.1

Exporting and Importing Alarm Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352

Alarm Groups .................................................... 353

15.5.1

Defining Alarm Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353

Actions and Events for Alarm Items and Alarm Groups ....... 354

15.6.1

Actions and Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354

15.6.2

Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355

Remote Alarm Server ............................................ 356

15.7.1

Remote Alarm Server Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356

15.7.2

Remote Alarm Server Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357

15.8

15.7.3

Remote Alarm Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358

Alarm Distributor ................................................ 359

15.8.1

Alarm Distribution Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359

15.8.2

15.10.1

15.10.2

Adding an Alarm Distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360

15.8.3

Configure Distribution Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365

15.9

Alarm Distributor Viewer ....................................... 369

15.10 Alarm Viewer .................................................... 370

Buttons Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370

Display Settings Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371

15.10.3

Alarm Viewer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371

15.11 Alarm Management in Runtime ................................ 372

15.11.1

Alarm Acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372

15.11.2

15.11.3

15.11.4

Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372

Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372

Play/Pause Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372

15.11.5

15.11.6

Info Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373

Alarm Viewer in Keyboard Operated Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373

15.11.7

Modifying Alarm Distribution Settings in Runtime . . . . . . . . . . . .374

16 Security Management ................................................... 375

16.1

General Security Settings ........................................ 375

16.2

16.1.1

Password Rules Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376

Security Groups .................................................. 377

16.3

16.2.1

Creating Security Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377

Users .............................................................. 378

16.3.1

Logging In and Logging Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379

16.4

Object Security and Visibility ................................... 380

17 Language Management ................................................. 381

17.1

Setting Up Multiple Languages ................................. 381

17.1.1

Adding Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381

17.2

17.3

17.4

17.5

System Texts ...................................................... 382

User Texts ......................................................... 383

Automatic Translation ........................................... 384

Exporting Languages ............................................ 385

17.6

17.7

Importing Languages ............................................ 386

Hebrew Language ................................................ 387

18 Audit Trail ............................................................... 388

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

Contents

18.1

18.2

18.3

18.4

Logging Strategies ............................................... 388

Using the Audit Trail Function .................................. 389

18.2.1

Audit Trail Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390

Audit Trail Viewer ............................................... 391

Audit Trail Export ................................................ 392

18.4.1

Audit Trail Export from an Operator Panel Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393

18.4.2

Audit Trail Export from a PC Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394

19 Text Library .............................................................. 395

19.1

19.2

Connecting Objects to Text Library Texts ...................... 396

Exporting and Importing Text Library Texts ................... 396

20 Database Export ......................................................... 397

20.1

Setting up Database Export ..................................... 397

20.1.1

Database Export from Operator Panel Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398

20.1.2

Database Export from PC Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399

21 Operator Panel System Software ....................................... 400

21.1

21.2

Welcome Screen ................................................. 400

Service Menu .................................................... 401

21.2.1

21.2.2

21.2.3

Service Menu in an Empty Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401

Service Menu in TxA/TxB Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401

Service Menu in TA Panels with Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401

21.3

21.2.4

Service Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402

Operator Panel Upgrade ........................................ 403

21.3.1

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403

21.3.2

Transfer Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403

22 Multiple Controllers .................................................... 405

22.1

Adding a Controller ............................................. 405

22.1.1

Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406

22.1.2

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407

23 Trouble Shooting ........................................................ 408

23.1

23.2

23.3

23.4

23.5

Project Build Failure ............................................. 408

Backup Project Issues ............................................ 408

Invalid Names .................................................... 408

Adobe Reader not Recognized .................................. 408

Expression Cannot Be Found ................................... 408

23.6

23.7

23.8

Performance Issue Related to Graphic Card .................... 409

Error Related to Third Party Controls .......................... 409

Performance Issue When Navigating in Script Tree View .... 410

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

The Configuration Tool

1 The Configuration Tool

1.1 Introduction

The iX Developer software is used to configure Operator panel and PC operated control applications, including applications for IPCs (Industrial PCs) from Beijer

Electronics.

iX Developer contains all basic functions needed in an application. The functions are tested and developed with customer needs and preferences in focus.

Pre-defined objects in iX Developer can be used to create complete process images, providing an overview of a complex application. You can customize the pre-defined objects or create objects of your own.

Communication drivers for a large number of controllers and automation equipment are available.

The help file assumes that the most recent versions of the system program (image) and iX Developer are used.

1.1.1

Controller

Operator panels can be connected to many types of automation equipment, such as PLCs, servos, and drives. Further on, the expression

controller

is used as a general term for the connected equipment.

Related information

Controller

1.1.2

Tags

Data values in a controller are referred to as

tags

.

Tags may also belong to the system or be internal. A tag has a symbolic name and can be of different data types.

Objects connected to tags can change values in the controller, and tag values can be reflected by changing object appearance in various ways. Objects in a screen will remain static until connected to a tag.

Related information

Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

11

The Configuration Tool

1.1.3

iX Developer

System Requirements and

Limitations

Parameter

RAM

Processor

Operating system

Graphic card

Recommendation

2 GB

2 GHz or higher

Microsoft Windows XP SP3

Microsoft Windows 7

Microsoft Windows Vista

Pixel shader 3 or higher ensures full graphic acceleration

Updates

Software, drivers and protocols may have been updated since the USB stick was produced. Therefore, it is recommended that you use the built-in update function in iX Developer before creating a project.

Related information

Update Software

Updating Drivers

iX Runtime

Parameter

RAM

Processor

Operating system

Graphic card

Recommendation iX Runtime System Requirements

1 GB

1.3 GHz or higher

Microsoft Windows XP SP3

Microsoft Windows 7

Microsoft Windows Vista

Pixel shader 3 or higher ensures full graphic acceleration

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

12

The Configuration Tool

Special Requirements for Some Objects

For some objects to be included in the iX Developer project, specific software versions are required. Simulation of the project on the development PC may also be limited for some targets.

Object

Media Player

PDF Viewer

Web Browser

Minimum requirement

Microsoft Media

Player version 10

Acrobat Reader version 9

Microsoft Internet

Explorer 7

Simulation on

PC target

Supported

Supported

Supported

Simulation on panel target

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Limitations for Keyboard Operated Panels

Some functions and objects are not supported for keyboard operator panels:

Key beep

Key repeat

PDF Viewer object

Web Browser object

Media Player object

Limitations for keyboard operator panels

Trend Viewer Legend tool

Database Viewer object

Filter dialog in Alarm Viewer object

Multiline in text box objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

13

The Configuration Tool

1.1.4

Getting Started

iX Developer is installed on a development PC, where projects are developed, designed and compiled. The project is then run in an operator panel, IPC or PC to observe and control a controller (or a group of controllers).

Target

•

•

• iX Developer projects can be targeted for

An operator panel from Beijer Electronics

An IPC (Industrial PC) from Beijer Electronics

A standard PC with Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 3, Microsoft

Windows Vista or Microsoft Windows 7

To enhance readability, only

operator panel

will be mentioned sometimes, when all different targets actually could be included.

Information about PC as a target is included in the manual since it is used as a target in the demo projects.

The functions in iX Developer depend on the model of operator panel used.

Some differences exist between the targets, for example:

Item

Media Player

PDF Viewer

Web Browser

Navigation List

Box

Support on IPC or PC target

Supported

Supported

Supported

Supported

Support on operator panel target

Not supported on Panel TxA

Screen Carousel

Dynamics

Opacity

Drop down shadow effect

Supported

All dynamic settings are supported

Supported

Supported

Not supported on Panel

TA/TxA/TxB and Q-Term panel

Not supported on Panel

TA/TxA/TxB and Q-Term panel

Some dynamic settings are not supported on Panel

TA/TxA/TxB, e.g. background color for button, trend viewer and meter, and min/max values for meter

Not supported on Panel

TA/TxA/TxB and Q-Term panel

Not supported on Panel

TA/TxA/TxB and Q-Term panel

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

14

The Configuration Tool

Item

Rounded corners on rectangle

Support on IPC or PC target

Supported

Report Supported

Support on operator panel target

Not supported on Panel

TA/TxA/TxB and Q-Term panel

Reports containing charts and pictures can not be printed from an operator panel target.

License

A project for an Operator panel can be used without any restrictions imposed by licensing.

A limited number of controller tags are available for a standard PC project.The

number of tags is controlled by a USB hardware dongle.

The industrial PCs (IPCs) from Beijer Electronics are configured with a fixed limit of tags, and do not require a USB dongle.

The number of used controller tags (including DEMO controller tags) is shown in the lower right of the desktop. The figures will turn red if the number of used tags becomes larger than the number of available tags.

There are no license restrictions for internal tags.

Related information

Internal Tags

DEMO Controller

Product Registration

The first time iX Developer is started, a registration dialog is displayed, in order to supply you with a registration key. Entering the registration key provides unlimited access to all program functionality and software updates.

Alternatively, select to continue using a trial version of the software. You may evaluate iX Developer with full functionality for 30 days. When the evaluation period has expired, it will still be possible to use the software, but the functions in the

Run

and

Transfer

groups will be disabled.

Note:

If you have already used a Demo version of iX Developer for 30 days, you will not be issued another 30 days for evaluation.

Project Size

The project size is shown in the lower right of the desktop area when designing an operator panel project. The size was calculated at the latest validation.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

15

The Configuration Tool

1.1.5

Installation

The iX Developer software is supplied on a USB stick. When connecting the

USB stick to the USB port, the installation will start automatically. Follow the instructions to install iX Developer. If the installation does not start, run the setup.exe file.

The installation creates an icon for iX Developer in the group named iX

Developer.

Click on

Start/All Programs/iX Developer/ iX Developer

to start iX Developer.

1.1.6

Project

The top folder for a specific application designed with iX Developer is referred to as the project folder.

During runtime, project database files can be updated, for example with new recipes. This means that to completely reproduce a project that has been in operation, it may be necessary to combine source files with files retrieved from the operator panel.

1.1.7

File Structure

A project contains a set of files related to the functional and graphical design and a set of files related to the runtime operation of the project, where the latter is compiled from the design files.

Project Folder

When a new project is created, a folder with the project name is created as the top-level container, the

Project

folder. The files that define the functional and graphical design reside in the top level of the project folder. Other folders are created as a result of validation and build.

Symbols

Pictures that are used in projects are converted to .png files when the project is validated.

Pictures are resized to the largest static usage in any of the project screens, in order to save memory space in the panel. If a picture is enlarged in runtime using dynamics, the enlarged picture will have a lower effective resolution.

Project pictures are stored in the

Symbols

folder as a compressed folder named

Symbols.zip.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

16

The Configuration Tool

Temp

The

Temp

folder contains intermediate build files from project compilation.

The

Temp

folder also includes the

Output

folder. The

Output

folder contains all files needed to run the project in the target. These files are copied to an operator panel when the

Transfer

command is used. For a PC target, the

Transfer to folder

command is used to copy the necessary files to a USB stick to the runtime PC via a network connection.

Moving Design Files

To move the project files needed for the design:

1. Create a new folder for the project design files.

2. Copy all single files (files not included in any folders) as well as all folders, except the

Temp

folder, in the project folder.

3. Paste the files in the new folder.

Moving Application Project

The runtime project can be downloaded to the operator panel using the transfer or export commands, but can also be moved manually:

1. Create the new folder for the project files.

2. Copy the

Output

folder.

3. Paste it in the new folder.

Database

•

•

•

•

The database used for iX Developer projects is of SQL Server Compact Edition type. The contents of the database can be managed with third-party database management tools. iX Developer includes a database viewer object that can be used to display database contents in runtime.

The database is initially transferred to the operator panel using the transfer command. The database will only be updated if there are changes made in the project that affects the database contents, for example:

Changed or added recipes

Changed or added data loggers

Changes to alarm handling

Changed or added trend viewers

A copy of the database can be made with the

Upload Database

command. Some of the databases can be exported individually in csv, comma separated values, format using the

Database Export

action. If possible, it is recommended to use the database export action rather than the backup database action.

Related information

Database Viewer Object

Download

Export

Upload Database

Database Export

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

17

Working with Projects

2 Working with Projects

This section describes iX Developer and explains how to work with a project for an operator panel.

In iX Developer, ribbons tabs are used instead of menu commands. This reduces the number of steps needed to design complex components, and also supplies an attractive user interface.

Ribbon tabs are located in the top section of the tool window. Each ribbon tab holds one or several control groups. Each group contains a set of related controls.

Controls are made to design screens, and to make settings for objects and controls in the project.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

18

Working with Projects

2.1 Creating a Project

A project can be created according to the following sections, but the work process can be adapted and rearranged if needed.

2.1.1

Connecting to a Controller

Establishing communication between an operator panel and controller is necessary to allow operator observation and control. The larger the project is, the more important it is to ensure that there is a suitable communication design.

There is a built-in DEMO controller in iX Developer. It can be used for test and simulation purposes.

Related information

Creating a New Project

Select Controller

Communication Design

DEMO Controller

2.1.2

Designing a Screen Set

It is important to organize the application well and to consider which functions are necessary. Start with an overall view and then work down to a detailed level.

A project contains a number of screens with objects that can exchange data with the controller. Screens can be arranged in hierarchies to achieve a structured application, or organized as sequence controls. When deciding which structure to use, consider how to best describe the process at hand and how to simplify procedures for the machine operator.

The complete application, or parts of it, can be tested in the development environment before downloading it to the operator panel.

Related information

Screens

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

19

Working with Projects

2.1.3

Alarms

Designing Additional Functions

Alarms are used to make the operator aware of events that require immediate action. An alarm is set when a certain condition is met. An alarm condition is designed as a logical evaluation of a tag value. Alarms can be divided into groups to create an order of priority.

Related information

Alarm Management

Function Keys

Function keys can be used to perform actions and execute scripts. This allows operator control of data and screen functionality independent of which screen is active.

Related information

Function Keys

Multiple Languages

Translation of texts and system texts can be performed directly in the application, or via export to a text file to be translated in other software. The file is imported to the application after translation. The application language can be changed in runtime, for example based on a tag value.

Related information

Language Management

Security

Access to objects and actions in the project can be limited using security groups and user passwords.

Related information

Security Management

Text Library

With the text library function, text tables can be created, where values are linked to texts.

Related information

Text Library

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

20

Working with Projects

Audit Trail

The Audit Trail function allows tracking of operator actions.

Related information

Audit Trail

Data Logger

Data can be logged and saved to file. Bit, 16-bit, 32-bit and Real (Float) values can be logged. Be aware that logging of data consumes system resources and memory.

Related information

Data Logger

Scheduler

Setting and resetting digital tags in relation to the real-time clock can be performed using a scheduler, in order to control events in the process at special calendar times.

Related information

Scheduler

Recipes

Recipes are used to set or save a predefined group of tags in one operation.

Values can be predefined or collected from the controller, and then saved to a recipe in the operator panel. The operator can download the recipe at any time to the controller, which will start working with the recipe values. Recipe handling makes it possible to reuse large parameter sets, to improve efficiency of time critical production where a change of products must be made quickly. Recipe files can be created in the development project or with the operator panel.

Related information

Recipe Management

Reports

The reports function allows adding excel report templates to the project.

Related information

Reports

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

21

Working with Projects

2.2 Importing an Information Designer

Project

Existing Information Designer projects can be imported to iX Developer.

Information Designer is the previous software used to design projects for the

EXTER operator panels.

The import function is accessed from the Welcome page, displayed when starting iX Developer.

1. Select the Information Designer project file.

2. Select a name and location for the imported project.

3. Click

Finish

.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

22

Working with Projects

The project will be imported to the corresponding Operator panel target. All screens will be imported and graphical objects in the Information Designer project will be converted to corresponding iX Developer objects. Some objects may not be supported.

Functions such as recipes and data logging work differently in iX Developer, and will have to be reconfigured in the imported project.

During the import, a log file of unsupported objects and functions is created. It can be saved to disk for future reference.

2.3 Importing an H-Designer/ADP

Project

Existing H-Designer/ADP projects can be imported to iX Developer.

H-Designer/ADP is the previous software used to design projects for the

H-/PWS-series operator panels.

The following software versions are required:

Version

ADP iX Developer

Software

6.50 build 184

2.0

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

23

Working with Projects

2.3.1

Exporting the H-Designer/ADP

Project

First, the H-Designer/ADP project has to be converted to an a2i file from within

ADP by following the steps below:

1. Select

File/Export iX

.

2. Select a name and location for the export file, and click

OK

.

A message box confirms that the export is finished, and after clicking

OK

, you are asked if you want to see the log file. The log file is saved to the same location as the project file.

The log file declares successfully converted items as well as unsupported objects and functions.

2.3.2

Importing the a2i File

Then, the exported file is imported into iX Developer using the import function that is accessed from the Welcome page, displayed when starting iX Developer.

1. Select the a2i file.

2. Select a name and location for the imported project.

3. Click

Finish

.

The project will be imported to the corresponding Operator panel target. All screens will be imported and graphical objects in the H-Designer/ADP project will be converted to corresponding iX Developer objects. Some objects and functions may not be supported at all, and some objects and functions need reconfiguring in the imported project.

During the import, a log file of unsupported objects and functions is created. It can be saved to disk for future reference.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

24

Working with Projects

2.3.3

Limitations

All parts of the original H-Designer/ADP project will not be fully supported in iX

Developer. For example, for objects that use individual controller registers for read and write, only the register selected for write will be connected. Also, patterns and other decoration of objects may not be included in the imported project.

The following functions and objects will not be converted, or will need reconfiguration:

Controller

Function

Alarms

Macro and sub-macro

Recipes

Comment

Import of name list and addresses for the first two controllers in the ADP project is supported.

Import of controller settings such as IP address and COM settings is not supported.

Import of index registers is not supported.

Supported with the following limitations:

Not supported

Not supported

Object

Action push button

Alarm history table, active alarm list, alarm frequency table and alarm marquee

Animated graphic

Bar graph deviation

Day of week display

Dynamic ellipse and dynamic rectangle

Historical data table and historical event table

Moving sign

Multistate indicator

Pie graph

Set value push button

Seven segments

Trend graph

X-Y chart

Comment

The graphical control will be imported but the actions need to be reconfigured.

Not supported

Not supported

The graphical control will be imported but needs to be reconfigured.

The graphical control will be imported but needs to be reconfigured.

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

The graphical control will be imported but the curves need to be reconfigured.

Not supported

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

25

Shape

Arc

Free form

Parallelogram and solid parallelogram

Pie and solid pie

Scale

Shape

Solid polygon

Working with Projects

Comment

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

The graphical control will be imported but needs to be reconfigured.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

26

Working with Projects

2.4 Optimizing Performance

The following section presents a couple of issues to consider in order to optimize the iX Developer project. Some parts are related to the communication driver; other parts concern CPU load and flash operations.

2.4.1

Signal Types

Communication Performance

Tags used for driver communication can be static or dynamic. These are updated in different manners.

Static Tags

•

•

•

•

Static tags are updated continuously, even if they are not currently shown on the panel display.

Additionally, the operator panel reads the following items continuously:

Alarm tags

Data logger tags

Multiple languages tags

Controller tags with value change events

•

•

•

The communication time is not affected by the following:

Alarm messages

Schedulers

Tags linked to function keys

Dynamic Tags

Dynamic tags are updated only when they are presented on the display. An analog numeric object serves as an example of when a dynamic tag is used.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

27

Working with Projects

2.4.2

Communication Design

This section describes how tags are read and how the reading can be optimized to make the communication between the operator panel and the controller fast and efficient.

Keeping Tags in Consecutive Order

Define controller tags consecutively, for example M0.0-M11.7. If the tags are spread (e.g. I0.4, Q30.0, M45.3 etc.) a complete update will take longer time.

The number of tags in each package depends on the used driver and information about this can be found in the driver help file.

Tag Packages

Tags to be transferred are not all transferred at the same time, but are grouped into packages. The number of tags in each package depends on the driver for the controller.

To make communication as fast as possible the number of packages should be minimized. Consecutive tags require a minimum number of packages, but it is perhaps not always possible to program it this way. In such cases there is a “waste” between two tags.

Waste is the maximum distance between two tags that can be kept in the same package. The size of the waste depends on the driver used, and is included in the driver help file, e.g as in the table below:

Driver x

Number of signals/package

Waste

29

20

Analog signals

124

Digital signals

0

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

28

Working with Projects

Bit-Addressed Words vs. Regular Bit Devices

In most drivers it is better to use bit-addressed words than regular bit devices, since you can fit more digital devices in one telegram when using bit-addressed words, than when using bit devices.

Example

Driver x

Number of signals/package

Waste

29

20

Analog signals

124

0

Digital signals

This specific driver can have 29 analog devices or 124 digital devices in one telegram. If you use bit-addressed words in the selected driver, you can fit 464

(29*16) digital devices in one package. This is almost four times as many devices.

ASCII Strings

ASCII strings are transmitted in separate telegrams, and having a large number of strings will affect the communication performance negatively. If an ASCII string only has a small number of different string values, it may be a good idea to use the Text Library function in iX Developer with predetermined contents, thus minimizing impact on driver performance.

Related information

Text Library

2.4.3

Performance in the Operator Panel

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

It is important to understand that due to the complex nature of a running system, there are several things that affects the overall performance. The following list gives some examples of things to consider, when it is necessary improve the performance of the operator panel:

Number of tags

Number of sampled tags in trend viewers and data logger

Number of alarms

Driver performance

Multiple drivers

Type of panel

Alarm list size

Size of pictures

Scripts

Poll Groups

The default setting in iX Developer updates all tags every 500 ms. If some tags may be updated less often, it is possible to assign them to a poll group with a lower update interval. Poll groups are configured in the Tags configuration page.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

29

Working with Projects

Screens

Optimizing screen update time minimizes CPU load and flash operations. This can make a significant difference in graphic-intense projects that approach the limits of the panel’s capabilities.

Screen changes are carried out most efficiently through a show screen action, either on a function key or an object.

Trend Viewers and Data Loggers

Several trend viewers can show data from the same log item.

In order to improve performance in the panel, it is strongly recommended to place all log items logged on the same frequency/event in the same data logger or at least reduce the amount of data loggers.

Try to avoid having one data logger for each trend viewer.

Gradients

Using objects with gradients creates a slightly higher load on the CPU. If a large number of objects use gradients, this will make the screen update time significantly slower. Pay special attention to objects with gradients that are updated frequently, e.g. a bar graph with a style with gradients connected to a tag that changes at short intervals.

Reports

Using the reports function in a project will result in an increased panel startup time.

Related information

Action Groups

Trend Viewer

Reports

Data Logging Strategies

Symbols

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

30

Working with Projects

2.5 Maneuvering Objects with the

Touch Screen

Operator panels with touch screens do not have a built-in keyboard. All maneuvering is done with the touch screen by pressing distinctly with a finger.

Because of the resistive touch technology, the screen can only apprehend pressing on one place on the panel at the time. Pressing two points at the same time is interpreted by the panel as a point midway between the two pressed points.

Related information

Keyboard Operated Panels

2.5.1

Operate Objects

For an object to react, it is necessary to specify the behavior, typically by assigning a tag and defining an action. All objects can have actions linked to mouse down, mouse up, mouse enter and mouse leave events. Some objects have a predefined behavior, like sliders setting values, but can also have actions linked to mouse down and mouse up events.

Button

Pressing a button triggers a click- and mouse button event.

Text Box

Pressing on a text box object displays a virtual alpha-numeric keyboard on the panel screen. Type a text using this keyboard and finish by pressing [

ENTER

].

Analog Numeric

Pressing on an analog numeric object displays a virtual keyboard on the panel screen. The keyboard type depends on the format chosen for the Analog Numeric

— String, Integer, Decimal, Hex or Binary. Enter a value using this keyboard and finish by pressing [

ENTER

].

In runtime a validation of the value is done. If the value entered is out of bounds, the corresponding limit value for the object will be shown.

Slider

Pressing on the desired value position of a slider object sets it to the pressed position.

Actions Ribbon Tab

Mouse Button Action Triggers

Click Action Trigger

Virtual Keyboard

Validation Group

Related information

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

31

Working with Projects

2.6 Peripherals

2.6.1

USB

External devices such as a USB hub, flash drive, mouse, or keyboard can be connected to the USB host port.

2.6.2

Ethernet

The operator panel has built-in Ethernet port(s) for connection to controllers via

TCP/IP. The number of ports varies by model.

Related information

IP Settings

2.6.3

Memory Card

An internal SD memory card can be used to increase project memory in some

Operator panels.

An external memory card can be used as storage of e.g. pdf files and media files, to reduce used internal memory. Access to the files on the external memory card is available via scripting.

Related information

Project Group

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

32

3

Development Environment

Development Environment

This section describes how to work with iX Developer.

Clicking the

Options

button in the File menu allows adapting the tool behavior.

Related information

File Menu

Options

3.1 Starting iX Developer

Click on

Start/All Programs/iX Developer/iX Developer

.

iX Developer can also be started from the command line.

•

•

•

•

•

•

When iX Developer is started, it is possible to:

Create a new project using a wizard

Open an existing project - a list of recently opened projects is displayed

Open a sample project

Upload a project from a target

Import a project created in Information Designer

View the User’s Guide, based on an example project that serves as an instructive introduction to iX Developer

Projects can also be created or opened later from the File menu.

Related information

Creating a New Project

Importing an Information Designer Project

Starting iX Developer from the Command Line

Upload from Target

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

33

Development Environment

3.1.1

Creating a New Project

To create a new project using the wizard includes the following steps:

1. Start iX Developer.

2. Select to create a new project.

3. Select target for the project.

4. Select controller brand and model.

5. Name the project and define where files are to be saved in the PC environment.

Select Operator Panel

Select the appropriate target from the presented set of operator panels/PC.

The target can be changed later, from the

Settings

group on the

Project

ribbon tab.

When working with a project for panel T7A, T10A, T7B, T12B or T15B, it is possible to select the rotation of the panel from a drop-down list.

When working with a project for a standard PC, it is possible to select resolution from a drop-down list.

Related information

Changing Project Target

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

34

Select Controller

Select the appropriate controller for the project.

Development Environment

The demo controller, including regular tags (data containers) and counters, is used to design and test a project directly on the development PC without connection to an external controller.

Internal tags that work like controller tags, but are independent of an external controller, can be defined.

It is also possible to connect to an external OPC server.

The controller can be changed later by clicking the

Controller

button on the

Controllers

tab of the tags configuration page.

A project can connect to more than one controller. To set up multiple controllers:

Related information

Controller

DEMO Controller

Internal Tags

External OPC Server

Multiple Controllers

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

35

Development Environment

Select Location

The

Select Location

dialog controls naming of the project and where project files are saved in the computer environment.

1. Change the project name, if desired.

2. Select where to store the project files by clicking

Browse

, or accept the suggested location.

3. Click

Finish

to create the new project.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

36

Development Environment

3.1.2

Opening a Project

To open an existing project using the wizard includes the following steps:

1. Start iX Developer.

2. Select to open a project.

3. Browse to the project file in the appearing “open project” dialog.

Note:

It is possible to open a compressed ZIP file of the iX Developer project. The user will be prompted for a path where the ZIP file can be decompressed.

Related information

Compress Project

Download

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

37

Development Environment

3.1.3

Getting Familiar with iX Developer

The ribbon tabs (e.g.

Home

,

System

and

Insert

) are located in the top of the window when iX Developer is started. The control groups (e.g.

Clipboard

,

Screen

,

Objects

on the

Home

ribbon tab) are available in the ribbon area.

The Project Explorer contains a folder area, and is managed as a docked window.

The desktop area is where screens are drawn and where tags and functions are handled.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

38

Development Environment

Configuration of objects on a screen is mainly performed using the controls in the

Home

and

General

tabs. Selecting an object on the screen displays the Home ribbon tab; double-clicking displays the General tab, except for the Button object, for which the Actions tab is displayed instead. Several common commands are also available by right-clicking on an object in a screen.

Related information

Project Explorer

Positioning Windows

Screens

Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

39

Development Environment

Keyboard Navigation

Pressing

Alt

on the keyboard displays which keyboard shortcut commands can be used to execute a command or to enter a control group, e.g.

Alt + F

opens the

File

menu, and

Alt + I

displays the

Insert

ribbon tab control groups.

Keyboard Shortcuts and Function Key Commands

The list below includes some of the keyboard shortcuts and function key commands that are available in iX Developer:

Ctrl + Z

Ctrl + Y

Ctrl + A

Ctrl + X

Ctrl + C

Ctrl + V

Ctrl + N

Ctrl + O

Ctrl + S

Ctrl + B

Ctrl + I

Ctrl + U

F1

Keyboard shortcut / function key

Ctrl + P, [number of the screen]

Ctrl + E, L

Ctrl + E, H

F5

F6

Description

Switch between screens according to their order on the desktop

Lock selected elements on active screen (E indicates active editor)

Hide selected elements on active screen (E indicates active editor)

Undo

Redo

Select all

Cut

Copy

Paste

New project

Open project

Save project

Bold style

Italic style

Underline

Display help file. Pressing F1 from within the Script Editor displays scripting help.

Validate project

Run

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

40

Development Environment

3.1.4

Starting iX Developer from the

Command Line

iX Developer can also be started from the command line, by entering

"[Path to the

NeoIDE.exe file]" "[Project location]\[Project name].neoproj

".

Example

•

To start iX Developer, and open the project named Test1 in the directory

C:\MyProjects, select

Run

from Windows start menu, and type:

"C:\Program Files (x86)\Beijer Electronics AB\iX Developer 2\Bin\NeoIDE.exe"

"C:\MyProjects\Test1\Test1.neoproj"

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

41

Development Environment

3.1.5

File Menu

The

File

menu contains commands for creating, opening, saving, compressing and closing projects. It also offers the possibility to upload a project from a target and to update the iX Developer software and drivers via Internet or from file. The

File

menu is accessed by clicking on the iX Developer button.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

42

Development Environment

New

When you start iX Developer and select to create a new project, a wizard guides you through the creation of a new project, in the same way as having selected

Create New Project from the Welcome page.

Related information

Creating a New Project

Open

Selecting

Open

displays a dialog that allows selection of an existing project file by browsing.

Save

Selecting

Save

saves the project to the current project folder.

Save As

Selecting

Save As

allows saving the project with a different name and/or in a different location.

Creating a new folder when using the

Save as

command helps keeping the large number of project files neatly collected and easy to overview.

Note:

Selecting

Save as

cannot be used in order to make modifications of an existing project, keeping the original project unchanged, and saving the new version with another name. Changes will affect the original project anyway. It is recommended to make a backup copy of the original project, for example by using Windows Explorer, prior to modifying it.

Compress Project

Selecting

Compress Project

compresses the project and saves it as a ZIP file. The user will be prompted for a path where to save the ZIP file and will also be offered the possibility to password protect the ZIP file.

Related information

Compress Project

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

43

Development Environment

Upload from Target

Selecting

Upload from Target

allows uploading a compressed ZIP file of a project from a connected target.

Note:

To be able to use the “Upload from target” function, the checkbox “Download all source code” on the “Download” dialog must have been clicked before downloading the project to an operator panel. See the “Download” chapter for more information.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

44

Development Environment

Parameter

Connected targets

Upload

Verify

Log

Description

Choose the target type to transfer the project from.

Starts the transfer of the ZIP file from the selected target.

The user will be prompted for a path where to decompress the ZIP file. If the ZIP file is password protected, the user must enter the password to be able to upload and decompress the ZIP file.

Upload is supported for Panel TxA, TxB, TxC and PC targets. If greyed out, please update to latest “System program”.

The verify function enables the user to check if a target platform configuration is identical to the project configuration.

Verify is supported for Panel TxA, TxB, TxC and PC targets.

If greyed out, please update to latest “System program”.

Show the data being logged during the upload and verify process.

Related information

Download

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

45

Development Environment

Close Project

Selecting

Close Project

closes the current project and activates the start wizard.

Update Software

The latest updates and patches for iX Developer can be downloaded directly via an Internet connection.

Update Drivers

Drivers can be updated via Internet or from file.

Related information

Updating Drivers

About

Clicking the

About

button displays information about the current version of iX

Developer including the product registration key.

Options

Clicking the

Options

button allows making settings that control the behavior and appearance of iX Developer.

Language Options

Select in which language to run iX Developer. A restart of the application is required for the new language selection to have an effect.

Ribbon Options

•

•

GoToDefaultRibbonStrategy

: This option changes the active ribbon based on the context of the selection in the desktop. When an object is created or selected, the

General

tab tabs becomes active in the ribbon area. This is valid for any object except for button. A button object will activate the

Actions

tab, as this is considered to be more common as a next choice.

SimpleRibbonStrategy

: This is the default setting, and does not swap the active ribbon when the context of the current desktop selection changes.

Clicking on an object opens the

Home

ribbon, and double-clicking opens the

General

ribbon for most objects, but for buttons the

Actions

ribbon is activated.

Script Debugger Options

•

•

•

Arguments

: The “%1” argument is where the file name will be inserted. This option is applicable only when

Custom

is selected for

DebuggerType

.

Debugger

: Full path to the current debugger application.

DebuggerType

: Select

Default

or

Custom

. With the

Default

setting, the system will automatically provide the path to the debugger, if found.

allows the user to provide the path to a specific debugger.

Custom

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

46

Development Environment

Tags Editor Options

Selections under

Tags Editor Options

makes it possible to customize which columns to show by default in the tags configuration window.

Screen Editor Options

•

•

•

•

EnableInPlaceEditing

: This option allows editing an object directly when selecting it on the screen without having to access its properties on e.g. the

General

ribbon tab.

ShowPanelAround

: This option displays an outline of the selected panel model around the desktop area.

ShowSizeAndDistanceInformation

: The size of an object is displayed while resizing it. Distance to the edges of the desktop area is displayed when moving an object. The indication can be turned off, if desired, by setting this option to

False

.

ShowToolTips

: Useful tool tips are automatically displayed in iX Developer.

These can be turned off, if desired, by setting this option to

False

.

The screen editor options can also be modified using buttons in the lower part of the desktop area.

Related information

Screen View in Desktop Area

Mini Toolbar Options

•

The mini toolbar is a context menu addition with a subset of common controls from the

Format

,

Tag/Security

and

Name

groups.

ShowMinitoolbarAutomatic

: When this option is set to

True

the mini toolbar part of the context menu is displayed already when an object is selected. The mini toolbar will always show in combination with the context menu. The mini toolbar will remain active for a selected object, also after it has disappeared, until the selection or the pointer moves away. To show the mini toolbar again move the mouse pointer to the upper right of the object. With the default setting,

False

, the mini toolbar will only show in combination with the context menu for an object.

Exit

Clicking the

Exit

button closes the application. If there are unsaved changes, you are asked if you want to save them before exiting.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

47

Development Environment

3.1.6

Quick Access Toolbar

The

Quick Access Toolbar

contains controls, expected to be used frequently. The toolbar can be customized to include other buttons.

Save

Saves the current project to the location specified when the project was created.

Undo

Executed commands can be undone using the

Undo

button. Clicking the small arrow at the right of the

Undo

button lists recently made changes for selection of the undo operation.

The keyboard shortcut for

Undo

is

Ctrl + Z

.

Redo

A command that has been undone with

Undo

can be redone with

Redo

. The keyboard shortcut for

Redo

is

Ctrl + Y

.

Run

Performs a validation of script code and compiles the project. If the project is valid, a simulation is started on the development PC with connection to the selected controller. Also available from the

Transfer/Test

group on the

Project

ribbon tab.

Simulate

Performs a validation of script code and compiles the project. If the project is valid, a simulation is started on the development PC without connection to the selected controller. Also available from the

Transfer/Test

group on the

Project

ribbon tab.

Related information

Project Ribbon Tab

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

48

Development Environment

Customizing Quick Access Toolbar

Some of the ribbon controls can be added to the Quick Access Toolbar. Right-click on the desired control and select

Add to Quick Access Toolbar

or

Remove from

Quick Access Toolbar

.

3.1.7

Ribbon Tabs

The ribbon tabs contain grouped controls for editing and maintaining a project, screens and objects. Click on any ribbon tab to display the ribbon.

Use

Minimize the Ribbon

and

Maximize the Ribbon

to collapse and expand the ribbon control tabs, or double-click on a ribbon tab. This can also be done from the Quick Access toolbar.

Related information

Home Ribbon Tab

Project Ribbon Tab

System Ribbon Tab

Insert Ribbon Tab

View Ribbon Tab

Dynamics Ribbon Tab

General Ribbon Tab

Actions Ribbon Tab

Quick Access Toolbar

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

49

Development Environment

3.1.8

Additional Properties

Some ribbon groups include additional properties that can be configured by clicking the small arrow in the lower right corner of the current group.

The properties window displays available property groups available for selection at the left. The property groups available differ depending on which object is selected.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

50

Development Environment

3.2 Desktop Area

The desktop area displays screens and configuration pages for project components such as controllers and functions. The desktop area shows only one screen or component at a time. When multiple screens or components are opened a row of tabs are shown in the upper part of the desktop area. Clicking on a tab activates its contents for editing.

If there are more tabs open than can be displayed, navigation arrows in the upper part of the desktop area can be used to scroll between them.

3.2.1

Screen View in Desktop Area

Object appearance as well as size and appearance of the current screen can be managed by controls in the lower part of the desktop area. It is also possible to turn on and off the in-place editing function that allows editing text in an object directly when selecting it on the screen.

Show/Hide Size and Distance Information

The size of an object is displayed while resizing it. Distance to the edges of the desktop area is displayed when moving an object.

Show Size and Distance Information is activated

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

51

Development Environment

Show/Hide Info

It is possible to show information about which tag each object is connected to, and if dynamics or actions are configured for the object, by clicking on the

Show/Hide

Info

button.

Show Info is activated

Show/Hide Screen Tooltips

A semi-transparent tooltip is displayed for each object when the cursor is rested on it, if

Show Screen Tooltips

is selected. Tooltips for e.g. menu commands are not affected by this setting; only tooltips for objects on the screen.

Show Screen Tooltips is activated

Enable/Disable In-place Editing

This option allows editing an object directly when selecting it on the screen without having to access its properties on e.g. the

General

ribbon tab.

In-place Editing

is enabled

Show/Hide Panel Frame

Show/Hide Panel Frame

displays or hides a virtual panel frame surrounding the screen, when an operator panel is selected as target.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

52

Development Environment

Fit to Screen

Click on

Fit to Screen

to make the screen the maximum size that will fit in the desktop area.

Zoom

•

•

•

•

The following methods can be used to zoom in to or out from the desktop area:

Selecting a set zoom value from the

Zoom

drop-down list.

Setting the

Zoom Slider

to a desired zoom level.

Clicking the

Zoom In

and

Zoom Out

buttons.

Placing the mouse pointer anywhere in the screen and using the scroll wheel.

Pan

•

•

Panning of the current screen is possible in Layout mode, if the screen is larger than the desktop area.

Press and hold [

Spacebar

] (the mouse pointer will change its appearance from an arrow shape to an open hand).

Drag to pan the screen (the mouse pointer hand closes in panning mode).

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

53

Development Environment

3.2.2

Desktop View Modes

Screens and functions have different view modes. The default setting is

Layout

view mode, but screens and functions can be partly viewed and edited directly in code. The desired mode is selected from the lower left part of the desktop area.

The code for screens is in xaml and in C# for script.

Desktop view mode tabs

Caution:

Incorrect code entered in text mode (Xaml and Script) may result in errors that are not possible to recognize during analysis and build.

Erroneous code may result in unpredictable behavior and loss of data.

Layout

Screens and objects are usually edited in

Layout

view mode.

Xaml

A screen layout is defined in Xaml (Extensible Application Markup Language) code. The .xaml files are stored in the project folder.

Xaml code can be added and changed in the

Xaml

view mode. Any changes done in the Xaml code will affect the screen layout.

Script

In

Script

view mode scripted actions can be configured for screens, objects, tags, function keys etc.

Caution:

To display a script guide that describes iX Developer scripting possibilities in detail, select

Script

view mode, click anywhere in the code, and press

F1

.

Objects that can trigger events will show with expandable nodes in the

Script

view.

Clicking the [

+

] of such a node expands it and shows the trigger events for the object. Double-clicking on an event inserts its method heading with an empty code body. Scripts are written in C# syntax.

When actions are defined for an object, this will have precedence over script code.

Note:

Avoid using multiple trigger methods as this may lead to undesired behavior.

Use either a script or define actions with the controls on the

Actions

tab. Avoid using

Click Action Trigger

actions in combination with

Mouse Button Action Triggers

.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

54

Development Environment

Note:

The

ValueOff

and

ValueOn

events for internal variables are available for selection in script mode, but they are not executed when running the project.

Note:

The

ValueChangeOrError

event is available in script mode, but it should only be used with controller tags. It does not support internal variables or system tags.

Complex behavior can be created using script code.

Selections made in

Layout

view mode are kept when switching to

Script

view mode and vice versa.

Nodes with edited script code are highlighted in the expanded tree view.

Highlight of an edited node in the tree view

It is possible to disable a script without deleting it, by right-clicking on a node with script, and selecting

Unhook event handler

. This excludes the script from being run, even though there is code, and the node will no longer be highlighted.

Some objects, such as text boxes, list boxes and combo boxes, rely on script code for advanced behavior.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

55

Development Environment

Name Completion

A context sensitive name completion feature (IntelliSense) can be activated during typing with [

Ctrl

] + [

Spacebar

] and it triggers automatically when a period (‘.’) is typed after a code element. Using items outside the current scope is defined with the keyword

Globals

, but it is not possible to script to other screens than the currently selected.

Methods are completed without argument lists. Add parenthesis and arguments to complete a selection.

Note:

Incorrect script code may result in errors that are not possible to recognize during analysis and build. Erroneous code may result in unpredictable behavior and loss of data.

If there are errors in script code during validation of a project, it is possible to navigate to the erroneous position by double-clicking the error in the error list.

Press [

Ctrl

] + [

Shift

] + [

Spacebar

] while editing to get a tool tip with the allowed variants of an overloaded method. Use [

Up arrow

] or [

Down arrow

] to scroll.

Make a new selection or press [

Esc

] to close the tool tip.

Note:

It is necessary to do an explicit type casting of the tag format for operands of an overloaded method.

Script code can be used to format objects. If an object attribute is selected a tool tip with allowed methods will appear. Methods not part of the default C# API is either addressed with the full path or the library can be included.

Related information

Error List

Tag Format

Format Group

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

56

Development Environment

Example:

Filling a rectangle object using a color gradient from one color to another color.

The following code implements a gradient from red to purple in the rectangle.

The library with the “BrushCF()” method is added with “using” in the beginning of the example, together with the default libraries.

Note:

When a timer is used in script code, it is important to close the timer in the code.

Note:

Renaming objects and screens included in scripts in Layout mode will cause the scripts not to function.

Referenced Assemblies

Third-part components and objects that are added to the project via

Referenced

Assemblies

will be made available when scripting. Their methods and properties will be included by the name completion function, in the same way as for built-in components.

Related information

Referenced Assemblies

Name Completion

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

57

Aliases

Aliases can be configured in the

Aliases

view mode.

Related information

Aliases

Development Environment

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

58

Development Environment

3.2.3

Positioning Windows

The behavior of many windows can be adapted in order to suit the user; for example shown or hidden, or moved to another position on the desktop.

Docked windows representing control tools can be converted to floating windows.

Control tools can be docked separately or be managed as a tabbed group in a window. A docked tool window supports auto-hide.

When a window is dockable, a guide diamond appears when the window is moved on the desktop. Extended position arrows appear at the desktop edges. The guide diamond makes it possible to dock a tool window to one of the four sides of the desktop area. When a tool window is undocked, it floats on top of the desktop.

Dropping a tool at the center of a guide diamond creates a tabbed group of the tools inside the window that the guide diamond belongs to.

Docking a Tool

Drag the window heading to any position on the screen. If the tool is not docked it will become floating.

To re-dock a tool:

1. If the tool is docked already, double-click on its heading to change to floating.

2. Drag the tool to the center of the desktop. A guide diamond appears, pointing towards the four edges of the desktop. Release the window to the desired direction. When the mouse pointer is in position, an outline of the window appears in the designated area.

Docking a Tabbed Group

It is possible to dock a tool to an existing group of tools, creating a grouped window with tabs:

1. If the tool is docked already, double-click on its heading to change to floating.

2. Drag the tool to the center of the existing group. A guide diamond appears.

3. Drop the tool at the guide diamond center.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

59

Development Environment

Releasing a Tool from a Tabbed Group

When a window contains multiple tools, they will appear as tabs in the lower part of the window. To release a tool that resides in a tabbed group, drag the tab for the tool and drop it on the desktop.

Auto-Hide

Auto-Hide enables a maximized view of the desktop area by minimizing tool windows along the edges of the desktop area when not in use. Auto-Hide is turned on and off by clicking the Auto-Hide pushpin icon on the window title bar.

Tool windows will expand to original size when the pointer hovers over them.

When a hidden tool window looses focus, it slides back to its tab on the edge of the desktop area. While a tool window is hidden, its name and icon are visible on a tab at the edge of the desktop area.

Note:

The Auto-Hide function has to be turned off before a tool can be moved.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

60

Development Environment

3.2.4

Configuration Pages

Many functions, such as Alarm Server and Data Logger, are configured via table style configuration pages.

In some cases there are multiple configuration pages for a feature. When applicable, the configuration page for a feature can be opened to allow direct access. For example, it is possible not only to select a tag, but also to declare new tags, directly through the

Select Tag

field for an object.

Home

In a configuration page, the

Home

tab is used to add and remove items in a function or controller.

Edit Table Cells

Use the

Add

button to append a new item in the table view of the configuration page.

Use the

Delete

button in the

Home

tab or the

Delete

button on the keyboard to remove the active row in the table. Multiple rows can be selected using the [

Ctrl

] or [

Shift

] keys.

Keyboard Navigation

Navigation in configuration pages can be made using arrow keys or with [

Tab

].

Pressing

F4

inside a table cell will in some cases open selection list.

Pressing [

Enter

] acknowledges a selection, and pressing [

Esc

] cancels a selection.

Press [

Delete

] to remove a value when editing in a field. If a row is selected when pressing [

Delete

], the entire row will be removed from the table.

Use [

Spacebar

] to toggle a value in a check box.

Press [

Ctrl

] + [

Tab

] to shift focus from the table.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

61

Development Environment

Navigation in Layered Pages

A layered configuration page (for example the alarm items page) has some specific navigation functions.

Keyboard navigation down is made by pressing [

Ctrl

] + [

Down Arrow

]. This will navigate into an expanded group, and out again when at the last of the expanded rows.

Keyboard navigation up and out of a group is done by pressing [

Up Arrow

].

Expand a group with [

Ctrl

] + [

+

], collapse with [

Ctrl

] + [

-

].

Keyboard navigation between fields inside a group is made with [

Right Arrow

] or [

Left Arrow

].

Pressing [

Enter

] acknowledges a selection, and pressing [

Esc

] cancels a selection.

Auto Fill

Fields in the configuration tables are when possible automatically filled in when

[

Down Arrow

] is pressed when at the last table row. When needed, names and tag identifiers are incremented to avoid exact copies of symbolic names and tag identifiers. Incrementing is done if the last part of the string is an integer number.

A “1” will be appended to the string if no numeral character ends the string. This is useful when there are consecutive tags of the same type in the controller data.

Filtering Items

Items in configuration pages can be filtered by selecting

Show Selection

from the

Show Selection/Show All

button.

Clicking the button opens the Filter Builder.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

62

Development Environment

Several conditions can be used, and the different values/operators that can be used for making conditions are displayed when clicking on the condition building blocks.

Operands and operator nodes are context sensitive. Name strings are not case sensitive. Values in the filter builder are saved individually for each function during an edit session. A filter is built as a logical expression tree. A filter typically has operations on individual column values as leaf nodes and logical operators serve as main nodes.

The following color scheme is used:

Color Function

Red

Blue

Green

Grey

Logical operator

Column operand

Value operator

Value operand

An indication that a filter is used is displayed at the lower part of the configuration page.

Selecting

Show All

from the

Show Selection/Show All

button in the configuration page displays the complete, unfiltered list.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

63

Development Environment

3.3 Screens

Screens contain objects that can be displayed for the operator in runtime. A screen can contain predefined objects, such as buttons or an alarm list. Pictures of physical objects, such a pump, connected to controller data, can also be included to be used for control and monitoring of the physical object.

Properties are defined for each screen.

Screens are edited in the desktop area and can be managed from:

Location

The Navigation

Manager

The Screens list in the

Project Explorer

The Screen group of the

Home ribbon tab

The Screen group of the

General ribbon tab

Used for

Adding new screens, managing links between screens, deleting screens

Adding new screens, importing screens from other projects, renaming screens, setting screen as startup screen, saving screens as templates, deleting screens, editing screen scripts

Adding new screens, selection of screen template and background screen, deleting screens, language selection, screen security

Managing popup screen properties and selecting screens for preloading

3.3.1

Screen Name and Screen Title

All screens have unique names, visible e.g. in the Project Explorer and the

Navigation Manager. Names of all open screens are shown as tabs in the desktop area. The name of the current screen is displayed and can be changed in the Name group of the Home tab.

In runtime, the screen name is displayed together with the project title in the title bar as default. To display something other than the screen name, a screen title may be added in the Screen group on the General tab when the screen is selected.

If the project title on the Project tab is left empty, only the screen name or screen title is displayed.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

64

Development Environment

3.3.2

Background Screen

It is possible to use another screen as background screen, to, for example, create a uniform design of the screens in the project and avoid repetitive configuration.

Background screens belong to the current project.

Example

Follow the steps below to use a background screen:

1. Create a background screen with some reusable elements, such as navigation buttons, and rename it to a suitable name.

2. Create a new screen.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

65

Development Environment

3. Keep the new screen open on the desktop, and select the background screen from the

Screen

group of the

Home

ribbon tab.

The background screen is now used for the screen.

Any modification made to the background screen will be reflected in all screens using it.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

66

Development Environment

3.3.3

Startup Screen

The startup screen is the first screen that opens when a project is executed. By default, Screen1 is set as startup screen.

Another startup screen can be set at any time by right-clicking on the screen on the desktop or in the Project Explorer and selecting

Set as Startup Screen

.

The selected startup screen is easily distinguished from the other screens in the

Project Explorer by a blue outline when in focus.

3.3.4

Screen Template

The installation of iX Developer includes a number of screen templates with basic functionality. It is also possible to save your own screens as screen templates, by right-clicking on the current screen and selecting

Save Screen as Template

.

The screen template can be used in the current or other iX Developer projects.

If a selected screen template contains tags that were not previously included in the project, you can select to automatically add these to the Tags list.

To use a template screen, click the lower part of the Add Screen button in the

Screen group of the Home ribbon tab. A preview of screen templates is displayed.

User-created as well as predefined screen templates may be deleted by right-clicking on the template in the preview and selecting

Delete Screen

Template

. The folder of the selected screen is then permanently deleted from disk.

3.3.5

Screen Security

Using security settings for screens makes it possible to restrict access to screens based on user security groups, similarly to object security.

It is not possible to set security for the Startup screen.

When using a background screen, the security settings of the top level screen are applied.

When screens are imported from other iX Developer projects or from Information

Designer, security settings are included and will be used in the current project.

Object Security and Visibility

Related information

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

67

Development Environment

3.3.6

Popup Screen

Normally, only one screen is visible in the operator panel in runtime. Sometimes, a popup screen that behaves like as a floating window may be useful. Any screen can be configured as a popup screen:

1. Check

Popup screen

in the Screen group of the General tab.

2. Set the start position coordinates (X, Y) to determine where the screen will open. The position (1,1) corresponds to the upper left corner of the screen.

3. Set the desired width and height in pixels of the screen resolution.

Clicking

Modify Screen Size/Position

allows changing the popup screen size and position by dragging it with the cursor. The coordinates are updated automatically.

Modal Popup Screen

Checking the

Modal

option makes the selected popup screen modal, which means that the user cannot interact with other screens while this screen is visible. All other screens will still be updated.

Style

Different styles can be selected for popup screens for PC targets.

Note:

When using a web browser or pdf viewer object in a popup screen, only the default style for the popup screen is supported.

Open Popup Screen

A popup screen is opened in runtime by a

Show Screen

action on an object.

Note:

When configuring a Show Screen action for a popup screen, position of the screen can be selected. These settings override the settings made in the Screen group of the

General tab.

Close Popup Screen

A popup screen is closed in runtime by a

Close Screen

action on an object.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

68

Development Environment

3.3.7

Preloading Screens

The first time a screen is opened in a running project, some time elapses while compiling it. In order to minimize this time, it is possible to preload a maximum of 10 screens from the

Screen

group on the General tab while the screen is selected.

The selected screens will then be loaded at application startup instead of when opening the screen.

Note:

The time saved at screen opening is instead added to the application startup time.

Events related to screen actions (Screen Opened, Screen Closed and Screen

Closing) will not be carried out when a screen is preloaded.

Preloading the startup screen (or its background screen) has no effect. Popup screens cannot be preloaded.

Data items used by a screen selected for preload will be enabled during preloading and then disabled.

The preload function is available for operator panel targets only.

3.3.8

Importing Screens

Screens from other projects can be imported, by right-clicking in Screens area of the Project Explorer and selecting

Import

.

If the selected screen has a name identical to one of the existing screens, a new screen name is proposed.

If the imported screen includes tags that do not already exist in projects, you are asked if you want to add these.

Note:

No tag information, other than tag names, will be added by the import function.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

69

Development Environment

3.3.9

Grid

There are different methods to align objects in screens;

Snap objects to other objects

and

Snap objects to grid

. Grid properties are managed by right-clicking on the current screen and selecting

Grid

from the context menu. It is also possible to select not to snap objects.

Grid settings are global and will affect all screens.

Snap Objects to Other Objects

To help position objects in a screen snap lines will appear when an object is moved across the screen. The snap lines are used to align the dragged object with other objects on the screen.

Blue snap lines appear whenever the right, left, top, or bottom boundaries coincide with other object boundaries. A horizontal red snap line indicates that the center of the object is aligned with the center of another object. For vertical center alignment, select the objects and use

Align Center

in the Arrange control of the

Format group.

Snap Objects to Grid

Use the context menu and select

Snap to Grid

to enable binding to grid points for a moved object.

Snap to Grid

mode disables

Snap Lines

for dragged objects.

Grid

The different grid styles can be used as a help pattern when doing the layout of the objects on the screen.

Grid setting

Spacing

Show grid on screen

Grid style

Description

Number of pixels between grid lines

Displays the grid on the screen

Selection between dots and lines as grid style

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

70

Development Environment

3.4 Objects

Objects that can be created in a screen are available from the Objects group and the Component Library.

Snap lines are used to position objects in a screen and align a moved object with other objects.

Information about tag connections as well as size and distance information for objects on the current screen can be displayed by using the buttons in the lower part of the desktop area.

Related information

Objects

3.4.1

Create

Handling Objects

To insert a default-sized object, click the position on the screen where you want to place the object.

To give the object a specific size and shape, press the mouse button and drag to create the object on the screen. Press and hold [

Shift

] while creating an object to retain the aspect ratio of the object.

When creating a line object, press and hold [

Shift

] to constrain the line at 45 degrees angles.

Select

The

Select

tool is available at top left in the Objects group when the group is not expanded. The Select tool is the default tool when editing screens. After applying any other object control, the mouse pointer will return to the Select tool. When the Select tool hovers over a selected object the mouse pointer changes to a cross with arrowheads.

Move

The position of an object is part of the properties for the object. The position of an object can be changed in different ways:

•

•

Click and drag an object to move it to the desired position.

Open the property grid and edit the

Left

and

Top

coordinates.

To move the selected object one pixel at the time, select the object and use the arrow keys on the keyboard.

Copy and Move

Use [

Ctrl

] + drag to make a copy of the selected object, and to move it to the desired position.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

71

Development Environment

Resize

•

•

The size of an object is part of the properties for the object. To change the size of an object:

When the Select tool hovers over the resize handles of a selected object, the mouse pointer changes to an arrow. Resize the object to the desired size.

Open the property grid and edit the

Height

and

Width

values.

To resize the selected object one pixel at the time, select the object, press [

Shift

] and use the arrow keys on the keyboard.

Rotate

Note:

Rotate is only supported for projects designed for PC targets, and not for all objects.

Angle and rotation center is part of the properties for an object. The rotation center for an object is shown as a small white circle which by default is located in the center of the selected object.

When the Select tool hovers over the rotation center of a selected object the mouse pointer changes to a circle inside a square with arrow sides. This indicates that it is possible to move the rotation center.

To change the rotation center of an object:

1. Point to an object to select it. When an object is selected a red frame with handles is shown around the object.

2. Drag-and-drop the rotation center circle to the position that is to be the center of the rotation.

When the Select tool hovers next to a corner of the selection frame for a selected object the mouse pointer changes to a circular arrow. This indicates that the object is possible to rotate by the frame handle around the rotation center.

To change the rotation angle of an object:

1. Drag to rotate the object around its center position.

2. Use [

Ctrl

] + drag to rotate in steps of 15 degrees.

Cursor appearance for Resize, Rotation centre, and Rotate.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

72

Development Environment

Selecting Multiple Objects

Multiple objects on the current screen can be selected at the same time, with the use of the mouse pointer to draw a frame that touches the objects. Alternatively, select one object and then use [

Ctrl

] + click to select or de-select other objects.

A multiple selection can be used to arrange objects, by using the Arrange control on the Format ribbon tab. The object with the primary selection is used as guide object.

When multiple objects are selected, the primary selection is shown with a red frame, while all other objects in the group have blue frames.

Click on any object in the group to change this to the primary selection. A click or double-click on any object will make it the primary selection, and, if applicable, change the ribbon focus according to the selected ribbon behavior.

The groups shown in the General and the Actions tabs are dependent on the selection. When multiple objects are selected the tabs will show only the properties that are common for the objects in the selection. Property changes will affect all selected objects.

Hiding and Locking Objects

Objects can easily be hidden and locked using the Object Browser, but the commands are also available from the context menu. To make a hidden object visible again, or to unlock a locked object, the Object Browser can be used.

Related information

Object Browser

Property Grid

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

73

Development Environment

Creating Series

The Create series function facilitates creating a number of identical objects. The function handles adding graphic elements as well as controller connections.

The following example creates a series of analog numeric objects quickly and easily:

1. Create an analog numeric object and connect it to a tag (in this example; D0).

2. Right-click on the object and select

Create series

from the context menu.

3. Fill in the number of objects to add and make settings for the address incrementation, and click

OK

.

Parameter

Number of copies

Spacing

Address incrementation

Increment direction

Description

Enter the number of columns and rows to create

Specify the number of pixels between the added objects

Select how to increment addresses for the added objects.

Only addresses available in the driver will be added.

Select if addresses are to be incremented in horizontal or vertical direction

Graphical objects are added on the screen according to the settings made:

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

74

Tags are added to the project according to the settings made:

Development Environment

Right-clicking in the Tags configuration page and selecting

Create series

makes it possible to create a series of tags quickly and easily, without adding graphic objects.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

75

Development Environment

3.5 Navigation Manager

The Navigation Manager is used to manage screens and their relations with respect to project navigation in runtime. It can be activated/deactivated from the View tab. It provides an overview of all screens in the current project.

3.5.1

Screen Relations

The Navigation Manager is used to create relationships between screens.

Dragging the mouse pointer from one screen to another screen creates a relation. A button with a

Click

action is defined in the first screen. This

Show Screen

action has the second screen as target, and when clicking it in runtime, the second screen is opened.

Double-click on a screen to open the screen for editing in the desktop area.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

76

Development Environment

3.5.2

Add Screen

New screens can be added directly in the Navigation Manager.

Dragging the mouse pointer from an existing screen to an empty location in the

Navigation Manager area creates a new screen, with a relation to the original screen. A button with a

Click

action is defined in the first screen. This

Show

Screen

action has the second screen as target, and when clicking it in runtime, the second screen is opened. The button must be removed or changed manually if the new screen is deleted later.

3.5.3

Links in the Navigation Manager

A structure of screens and their relations to other screens will be imposed and shown in the Navigation Manager. The Navigation Manager will provide an overview to help add screens and manage the link relations between project screens.

Right-click anywhere in the Navigation Manager to change link appearance.

Link setting

Show Same Level

References

Show Back References

Description

Filters out links to screens on the same hierarchical level.

Directed Links

Orthogonal Links

Shows navigation links to higher hierarchical levels. When not selected, only links to screens on lower levels and links between screens on the same level are shown.

Draws straight link lines between screens, using the shortest way.

Draws link lines in an orthogonal pattern.

Changing the setting or the type affects the appearance in the Navigation Manager only.

3.5.4

Navigation Overview

It is also possible to display the

Navigation Overview

by selecting it from the

View

ribbon tab. It provides an overview of all screens included in the project, with zooming facilities.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

77

Development Environment

3.6 Project Explorer

The Project Explorer shows all screens and components included in the application. It can be activated/deactivated from the View tab.

The Project Explorer is divided into five groups; .

Loggers

,

Script Modules

and

Recipes

.

Screens

,

Functions

,

Data

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

78

Development Environment

3.6.1

Project Explorer Groups

Click on the group heading to expand/collapse the groups. The number of components in each folder is apparent from the group headings. Right-clicking on a group opens a subset of the commands from the

File menu

and

Insert

tab.

Right-clicking on a component in a Project Explorer group opens a context menu with a selection of common operations. Not all commands are available for all components.

Description Context menu command

Show

Rename

Add

Import

Delete

Opens the selected project component for editing in the desktop area

Renames the selected project component

Adds a new project component to the project

Imports a project component via browsing the hard disk; e.g. a screen from another project

Deletes the selected component from the project

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

79

Development Environment

Screens

The

Screens

explorer lists the screens included in the application. Clicking on a screen opens it for editing in the desktop area.

Screen Context Menu

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Right-clicking a screen opens a context menu with a selection of available operations:

Show

Rename

Import

Delete

Set as startup screen

Save screen as template screen

Add to screen group

Remove from screen group

The screen set to be the startup screen is marked with a green frame in the

screens

explorer.

Groups

•

•

•

•

The

Screens

explorer offers a possibility to assign screens to groups.

Right-click on the

All screens

heading in the

Screens

explorer and select

Add group

followed by entering a unique name for the group in the appearing dialog.

To assign a screen to a group, simply right-click a screen in the

Screens

explorer and select “Add to Screen Group” from the context menu. Select a group to add the screen to from the appearing “Select Screen group” dialog.

To show available groups, double-click the

All screens

heading in the

Screens

explorer. Screens not assigned to a group will be listed as

ungrouped screens

.

Right-clicking a group enables a context menu from which you can choose to rename or delete the group.

Note:

Deleting a Screen group also deletes all of its assigned screens.

It is also possible to assign a screen to a group by a simple drag and drop operation.

Drag the screen symbol and release it on the group.

Zoom Slider

The Zoom slider is found in the

Screens

explorer and provides a way to quickly zoom in and out of your

screens

explorer.

Search

The search function provides the option to search for screens using the screen name or

screen-id

.

The search is only performed within the selected group.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

80

Development Environment

Functions

The Alarm Server, Multiple Languages and Security functions are predefined, as well as Tags, and cannot be deleted from the Functions folder. The other functions can be added from the Insert menu. Most functions will be available from the

Functions folder after having added them to the project, but some functions are assigned folders of their own.

Clicking on the function in the Functions folder opens its configuration pages for editing in the desktop area.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

81

Development Environment

Alarm Distributor

Alarms can be distributed between operator panels, with notification via printer,

SMS or e-mail using the alarm distributor.

Related information

Alarm Distributor

Alarm Server

The Alarm Server handles alarm groups and alarm items.

Related information

Alarm Server

Alarm Groups

Alarm Items

Audit Trail

The Audit Trail function enables tracking of operator actions.

Related information

Audit Trail

Function Keys

Function keys for operator panels as well as for the regular PC keyboard can be configured.

Related information

Function Keys

Multiple Languages

Configuring multiple languages for user texts and system texts are supported. The texts can be exported, edited and reimported to the project. A tool for automatic translations is also included.

Related information

Language Management

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

82

Development Environment

Reports

The reports function allows adding excel report templates to the project.

Related information

Reports

Scheduler

A scheduler can be used to control events in the process at special times.

Related information

Scheduler

Security

Users and groups of users can be set up for security purposes.

Related information

Security Management

Tags

Clicking on

Tags

in the Functions folder displays the tags configuration page in the desktop with all the tags that are used in the application. Tags are added by clicking on the

Add Tag/Add System Tag

button.

Tags can belong to a connected controller, or be internal. Internal tags can be used and selected in the same way as a regular controller tags.

System tags are used to monitor or access variables from the system, for example

Used RAM

or

DateTime

. System tags are indicated by blue color in the tag list.

Related information

Tags

Internal Tags

System Tags

Text Library

With the text library function, text tables can be created, where values are linked to texts.

Related information

Text Library

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

83

Development Environment

Recipes

Several recipes can be inserted in the project. Each recipe function handles a pre-defined set of recipe items.

Related information

Recipe Management

Script Modules

Clicking on a script module in the Script Modules folder opens the script editor in the desktop area. A script module can be included to program features not covered by included functions and actions, or to be used to share functionality among functions.

Related information

Script

Data Loggers

Data can be logged and saved to a database on time intervals or depending on changed values.

Related information

Data Logger

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

84

Development Environment

3.7 Component Library

The Component Library contains reusable components for a project.

3.7.1

Components

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

The Component Library includes a large number of predefined graphical objects, categorized into groups. User-defined graphical objects and other files may also be saved in the component library. All components in a sub folder must have unique names.

Examples of components that may be included in the library: predefined components objects text objects configured with multiple texts symbol objects configured with multiple symbols grouped objects external pictures text folders (file folders) htm/html files media files

PDF files

Since plain text can be saved as a component, it is possible to save reusable script components by dragging a section of script code from the Script view into the

Component Library.

A component is displayed with its name and a thumbnail representation in the

Component Library window.

Grouped objects are displayed as a thumbnail representing the primary selection of the object. Text files and folders are represented by operating system thumbnails.

Project Pictures

The Project Pictures folder is project specific, and contains pictures that are used in the current project. The components in Project Pictures are stored in the project’s

Symbols folder.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

85

Development Environment

Project Files

The Project Files folder is project specific, and contains files that have been added when creating the project.

Project files and folders can be added and deleted from the Project Files folder before downloading the project to an operator panel. The Project Files folder is located in the Project folder.

For instance, “C:\MyProjects\ProjectFolder\Project Files”.

It is also possible to access the operator panel via ftp to add and delete files and folders after the download, provided that the FTP service is enabled in the project.

Related information

FTP

Download

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

86

Development Environment

3.7.2

Add and Use Components

Drag-and-drop any component from the library to the current screen, or use copy

[

Ctrl + C

] and paste [

Ctrl + V

] commands.

Objects can be copied or moved to the Component Library.

A text file, that is saved in the Component Library will be converted to a text box object when pasted into a screen.

A component (picture or group) that is originally copied from an object with a tag connection will keep its tag connection and any dynamic properties when used from the Component Library.

Note:

If a component with a tag association is reused in another project then all referenced tags must be present in the new project.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

87

Development Environment

3.7.3

Component Library Window

The component library is available as a tab at the right-hand side of the desktop. The window is configured with auto-hide functions, and can also be activated/deactivated from the View ribbon tab. Its appearance can be managed just as other tools; as docked or floating windows.

User-Defined Categories

Right-click on an empty space of the Component Library window and select

New

to create a new category, and select a name of your preference. User-defined categories are not project specific. This means that all objects saved in a user-defined category will be available in all iX Developer projects.

Expand and Collapse Folders

The top area is a contents frame that is used to navigate through the folders of the

Component Library. The contents heading displays the name of the currently selected folder. The folder view can be expanded and collapsed with the control to the left of the displayed folder name.

Search

The

Search

feature provides a case-insensitive and alphabetical search, based on the component label, in the current folder and in all sub folders.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

88

Development Environment

Zoom

The Zoom slider at the bottom area of the tool window can be used to change the size of the displayed components. Resting the mouse pointer over a component displays a full-size picture of the component.

Component Library window, displaying full size of a selected component

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

89

Development Environment

3.8 Property Grid

Most properties and settings for an object or screen are defined from its General and Home tabs.

A detailed overview of object properties is available by selecting

Property Grid

from the View ribbon tab or by selecting

Properties

from the context menu.

The property grid includes more properties and settings than the ribbon tabs, for example size and position of objects, and delay of mouse and touch screen input in runtime.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

90

Development Environment

Property groups can be collapsed/expanded.

The window is configured with auto-hide functions. Its appearance can be managed just as other tools; as docked or floating windows.

3.8.1

Search

The Search feature provides a case-insensitive and alphabetical search, that makes it easy to reduce the number of displayed properties.

3.9 Object Browser

An overview of all objects included in a screen can be displayed in the Object

Browser.

It is easy to bring objects that may have been obscured by other objects up front, by using the arrows at the top left.

Clicking the buttons at the right side of each object enables simply hiding/showing and locking/unlocking objects.

Note that the top-to-bottom order in the Object browser corresponds to the front-to-back order on the screen.

3.10 Output

The Output window contains messages concerning the project validation and build. Created project files with folder paths and any found errors will be listed in

Output.

Note:

Incorrect code entered in text mode (Xaml and Script) may result in errors that are not possible to recognize during analysis and build.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

91

Development Environment

3.11 Error List

The Error List contains information about problems and errors detected in iX

Developer for the current project. Build errors are reported in the Output window.

3.12 Help

The Help file for iX Developer can be opened by pressing

F1

on the keyboard or using the

Help

button in the ribbon tab heading.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

92

4 Tags

Objects connected to tags can change values in a controller, and controller values can be reflected by changing object appearance in various ways. Objects in a screen will remain static until connected to a tag.

A tag has a symbolic name and can be of different data types.

Tags can belong to a connected controller, be internal or belong to the system.

Internal tags are used to handle local data values, and can be viewed and treated in screens just like regular controller tags.

The global tag list provides an overview of all used tags, regardless of controller.

This makes it easy to develop projects that can be used with a variety of controllers.

It is also possible to connect a tag to more than one controller simultaneously.

4.1 Adding Tags

Tags are handled by clicking on

Tags

in the Functions folder in the Project

Explorer.

Tags

Clicking the

Add Tag/Add System Tag

button adds a new tag to the list. Make settings for each added tag. When predefined values are available, these can be selected by clicking the arrow at the right of the table cell.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

93

4.1.1

Basic Settings

To reduce complexity in the tags configuration page, some columns can be made hidden/visible. The basic settings are always displayed. It is possible to customize which columns to show by default using

Tags Editor Options

.

Enter name, data type and access rights for the tag. Select if the tag is to belong to a controller entered on the Controllers tab. If no controller tag address is entered, the tag will be treated as an internal tag.

Name

Parameter

Data Type (Tag)

Access Rights

Controller

Data Type (Controller)

Description

Symbolic name. The name can be any alphanumeric string, beginning with a letter (a-z, A-Z).

Selection of presentation format; for example used to show the correct engineering unit when using scaling. DEFAULT follows selection made for Data Type

(Controller).

Defines access rights to the tag

Controller address

Selection of data type

Tags Editor Options

Scaling

4.1.2

Scaling

Related information

Scaling affects only tags connected to a controller.

Checking the

Scaling

box displays the

Offset

and

Gain

columns. These parameters are used to change the scale of the controller value to a value shown in accordance with the following equation:

Panel value = Offset + (Gain * Register value)

When the value for an object is changed from the operator panel, the scale is changed to the value shown in accordance with the following equation:

Register value = (Panel value - Offset)/Gain

Scaling does not affect the defined maximum and minimum values, or the number of decimals.

4.1.3

Data Exchange

Checking the

Data Exchange

box displays the

Direction

and

When

columns.

Data exchange supports real time data exchange between different controllers; also of different brands. The data exchange can be performed when a digital tag is set or at a certain time interval, set up on the Triggers tab. Data exchange can be selected for individual tags, array tags or for the complete range of tags.

Related information

Data Exchange

Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

94

4.1.4

Others

Checking the Others box makes it possible to configure a number of additional tag properties.

Parameter

Description

Poll Group

Always Active

Non Volatile

Initial Value

Index Register

Action

Log to Audit Trail

Audit Trail Description

Description

An optional description of the tag. Description of system tags is added automatically.

Please note that the description can not be more than 200 characters long. Descriptions longer than that will cause build errors.

Makes it possible to poll groups of tags at different intervals.

Prevents the tag from becoming inactive. This may be useful for actions and scripting purposes. Note: The

Active setting for the controller on the Controllers tab is predominant over the Always Active setting for a particular tag.

Keeps the last tag value in memory even when the panel or

PC is powered off. Only available for internal tags.

Makes it possible to assign a tag an initial value at system startup. Only available for internal tags.

Makes it possible to select a register from which an object is to collect the shown value.

Makes it possible to configure actions based on a condition of a tag.

Logs operator actions on the tag. Only available if the

Audit Trail function is activated in the project.

Optional static or dynamic descriptions for operator tag actions, that are saved in the Audit Trail database and visible in the Audit Trail Viewer. If

Dynamic Description

is selected, value before change can be included in the description by using {0}; value after change by using {1}.

Only available if the Audit Trail function is activated in the project.

Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

95

Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

96

4.1.5

Adding Tags during Editing

Tags can be added directly when editing objects. When an object is selected, the tag association can be managed from the Tag/Security group in the Home or

General ribbon tabs, or by right-clicking on the object and using the Mini Toolbar.

In both cases, tags are added by clicking the

Add

button.

Note:

Tags added during editing will stay internal until connected to a controller on the tags configuration page.

Related information

Tag/Security Group

Mini Toolbar Options

4.1.6

Selecting Multiple Tags

Multiple rows of tags can be selected using the [

Ctrl

] or [

Shift

] keys. This makes it easy to, for example, delete a number of tags quickly.

Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

97

4.2 Tag Actions

One or multiple actions can be configured depending on a changed value of a tag. The Action column is displayed when the

Others

box is checked in the Tags configuration page.

Clicking

...

in the Actions column for the selected tag brings up the Action properties window. First, a condition is configured by clicking

Add

under

Condition. Select a condition, enter a value and click

OK

.

Tags

Then, configure actions to be executed when the condition is met.

Actions Ribbon Tab

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

Related information

98

4.3 Internal Tags

Internal tags can be used to calculate values that need not be represented in the controller, for example information only for the operator. Internal tags are selected in the same way as an external controller tags. Any number of volatile user defined tags can be created.

Note:

Internal tag values will not be saved in the operator panel when the project is restarted, unless the

Non Volatile

option is used.

Unlike the regular drivers, it does not matter if internal tags are used in consecutive order or not.

Note:

The

ValueOff

and

ValueOn

events for internal variables are available for selection in script mode, but they are not executed when running the project.

Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

99

4.4 System Tags

System tags are used to monitor or access variables from the system. System tags are handled as regular controller tags, i.e. can be used in screens, logged, included in scripts etc. The Date and Time system tags can be used when you want to use the controller clock in the panel project. The following system tags are available:

System tag group

Communication

Date and

Time

Project

System tag Description

Communication Error

Message

Communication Errors

Latest communication error message

Remote Alarm Server

Connection Errors

DateTime

Day

Day of Week

Hour

Minute

Month

Second

Year

Current Screen Id

Current Screen Name

Latest Loaded Recipe

New Screen Id

Number of active communication errors on all controllers

Number of remote alarm servers with connection errors, e.g. disconnected servers.

Current date and time

Day component of current date

Day of current week (1-7 where 1 is Sunday)

Hour component of current time

Minute component of current time

Month component of current date

Second component of current time

Year component of current date

The ID of the current screen.

The data type of this tag is int16 and it only has read access. This tag gets updated every time you open a screen, with the exception on pop up screens. When opening a pop up screen the current screen id tag will not be updated. When entering a screen without a screen id the tag value of the current screen id will be set to -1. Note that 0 is a valid screen id.

Name of the current screen

Name of the latest loaded recipe

The ID of the new screen.

The data type of this tag is int16 and it has read/write access. The tag is always active.

When the new screen id tag changes value a screen jump is made to the screen with corresponding screen id. If no such screen exists a notification message will show.

If the new screen contains configured screen instances (alias), the default instance is always displayed.

Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

100

System tag group

System

System tag

Project Name

Runtime Version

Screen Update Time

Available RAM

Available Storage

Backlight Brightness

Level

CPU Load

Current User

Description

Name of the current project

Runtime version of framework

Screen update time (in ms)

Amount of available RAM memory (in kB)

Amount of available storage memory (in MB)

Backlight brightness level (in percent)

Amount of used CPU capacity (in percent)

The user name of the currently logged in user

Indicates if debug logging is enabled.

Debug Logging

Enabled

Internal Temperature

Physical RAM

Power LED Blink

Frequency

Power LED Blue

Intensity

Power LED Red

Intensity

Storage Memory

Internal panel temperature (in °C)

RAM memory installed in computer (in kB)

Blink frequency of the power LED (1–10 Hz,

0 = always on)

Intensity of the blue power LED (0–100)

Intensity of the red power LED (0–100)

Used RAM

Used RAM Percent

Used Storage

Used Storage Percent

Storage memory installed in computer (in

MB)

Amount of used RAM memory (in kB)

Amount of used RAM memory (in percent of physical)

Amount of used storage memory (in MB)

Amount of used storage memory (in percent of all storage)

Windows CE Image Version Windows CE Image

Version

System tags are indicated by blue color in the tag list.

System tags are added by clicking the

Add Tag/Add System Tag

button in the tags configuration page.

Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

101

4.5 Array Tags

An array tag is a tag containing multiple values.

If the array size is >1, the tag is considered as an array tag.

Note:

Array tags are only supported by controllers which use addresses that can be numerically increased.

4.5.1

Array Tag Set Up

Clicking the

Add

button adds a tag to the list. Make settings for each added tag.

When predefined values are available, these can be selected by clicking the arrow at the right of the table cell.

Clicking the

Data Type

cell in the

Controller

column brings up the data type configuration page. An array tag is configured by setting the array size to a value

>1.

Tags

Data type

Data Type

Size

Array Size

Description

Selection of presentation format.

Set the array size.

If the array size is >1, the tag is considered as an array tag.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

102

Limitation

When using controllers with named variables and accessing individual bits with the syntax VariableName.BitNo, array tags of data type BOOL with bit addressing, are only supported for 16-bits tags.

Related information

Tags

Chart Object

Data Exchange

Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

103

4.6 Cross Reference

The Cross Reference tool provides an overview of where a specific tag is used in the current project.

Tags

All occurrences of the tag in the current project are listed. Double-clicking on an occurrence in the list automatically brings you to the object or function where the tag is used.

The cross reference tool can be accessed by clicking the cross reference button on the

Tags

tab or on the View ribbon. It can also be accessed from the context menu.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

104

4.7 Triggers

Triggers are used to determine when data exchange is to be performed; based on tag or a certain interval.

Tags

Name

Parameter

Tag

Time

Description

Symbolic name. The name can be any alphanumeric string, beginning with a letter (a-z, A-Z).

Selection of a tag, which when changed to a value other than 0, triggers data exchange

Time interval between data exchange operations in the format HH:MM:SS

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

105

4.8 Poll Groups

Poll groups allow grouping tags for polling at 5 different intervals. The groups defined on the Poll Groups tab are available for selection from the Tags tab after checking the

Others

box.

Tags

Name

Parameter

Interval

Description

Symbolic name. The name can be any alphanumeric string, beginning with a letter (a-z, A-Z).

Polling interval in ms

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

106

4.9 Station Handling

For some controllers, it is possible for the operator to define from which controller station to read or write values. The station number is given as a prefix to the controller address.

The station number for each controller is defined on the Controllers tab of the

Tags configuration page, by clicking the

Settings

button.

The default station is set on the

Settings

tab, and the stations are defined on the

Stations

tab.

Tags

In this example, from an Ethernet driver, Station 0 is the default station.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

107

The default station is the station addressed without using a prefix. The other stations can be addressed either as a fixed number or as an index register. With fixed station numbers, an object is always connected to the same controller address, and only the value of this controller address can be used in the object.

When addressing for example D10 in station 2, the following syntax is used:

2:D10

Tags

Related information

Using Index Registers for Station Handling

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

108

4.10 Index Registers

With index addressing, it is possible for the operator to select from which tag an object is to collect the shown value. Without index addressing an object is always connected to the same controller address, and only the value of this address can be shown in the object.

Tags

Which tags to use for indexing are defined on the Index Registers tab of the tags configuration page. Up to eight different index registers can be used for each controller, and each index register can be used for more than one object. Index registers can be connected to any tag in the global tag list, but the tag has to be selected for each controller.

Tags are connected to index registers on the Tags tab.

In general index addressing can be formulated as:

Display value = the content in tag (the object’s address + the content in the index register)

If the content in the index register is 2, and the address of the tag specified in the object is 100, the value shown in the object will be collected from address 102.

If the value in the index register is changed to 3, the value in the object will be collected from address 103 instead.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

109

4.10.1

Index Addressing Example

Using index registers may be convenient when for example controlling torque and speed of a number of connected motors from the same screen, without having to configure and display maneuverable objects for each motor.

The following example is based upon the presumption of three motors, and the torque and speed of each motor is held in a different tag:

Torque

Speed

D11

D21

D12

D22

D13

D23

Motor 1

Motor 2

Motor 3

Torque

Speed

Torque

Speed

1. Create a project where the Demo Controller is selected as controller.

Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

110

2. Add tags and labels and connect them to Demo Controller tags according to below:

Tags

3. Select the Index Registers tab and connect

Index 1

to the

MotorIndex

tag

(D0).

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

111

4. Select the Tags tab again and check the

Others

box in order to display the

Index Registers column.

5. Connect the

Torque

and

Speed

tags to Index Register 1.

Tags

6. Now, create a ComboBox object for selection of motor, and two analog numeric objects that will display (or set) the Torque and Speed tags for each motor. Also add explaining labels.

7. Click

Configure Texts

for the ComboBox object, connect the object to the

MotorIndex tag, and add three texts and values according to below.

8. Connect the analog numeric objects to the Torque and Speed tags.

9. In order to test that the index addressing works even though no controller is connected, add maneuverable objects, e.g. sliders, and connect them to the

D11–D13 and D21–D23 tags.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

112

10. Run the project, enter values for the objects connected to D11–D13 and

D21–D23, and select the different motors using the ComboBox.

Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

113

4.10.2

Using Index Registers for Station

Handling

For some controllers, it is possible for the operator to define from which controller station to read or write values. The station number is given as a prefix to the controller address.

This is stated either as a fixed number or as an index register. The default station is the station addressed without using a prefix. The other stations can be addressed either as a fixed number or as an index register. With fixed station numbers, an object is always connected to the same controller address, and only the value of this controller address can be used in the object.

Index addressing reduces the number of tags needed as well as the number of objects to be configured in the iX Developer project when showing values from / writing to multiple controller stations.

The syntax when using index registers for station handling is for example

I1:D10

.

Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

114

Tags

This means that the value in the controller address connected to Index 1 will point out which controller station number to read or write values.

Station Handling

Related information

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

115

4.11 Expressions

The Expressions functionality is used when connecting an object to a tag and the purpose is not to use the tag value as it is. Expressions enable the user to e.g.

extract a bit from a tag, add a dynamic offset or gain, and then to use this value for a specific object.

Note:

Static offset and gain for a tag is set in the tags configuration page.

The same expression can be connected to more than one object in the project.

4.11.1

Definition

An expression is a one line return statement in C#. The default expression code is

“value”.

Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

116

4.11.2

Using Expressions

Click the button next to

Select Tag

on the

General

ribbon tab when an object is selected. The Expressions dialog is displayed.

Tags

Click

New

to create an expression and expression group (optional). Existing expressions are available from the

Select Expression

drop-down menu. Use the

Edit

and

Delete

buttons to edit or delete existing expressions.

Select among the tags, operators and functions to insert. It is also possible to type the expression manually, but without assistance from IntelliSense (auto completion). If an expression is not valid, an error message is given when validating the project. The expression is run, when the value of the original tag that is connected to the object is changed.

Expressions added to an object in a project are available only in the current project.

If an object with a local expression is saved into the Component Library, the object can be used in an other project, but the expression is not included. In order to reuse expressions, they have to be saved in the expressions library.

Related information

Library Expressions

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

117

4.11.3

Library Expressions

Examples of expressions (how to extract bits from an int) are included when installing iX Developer and can be added to the project by clicking

Load

.

Expressions can be reused in other projects by saving them in the expression library. Select the expression in the drop-down list and click

Save

. The expression is saved to a file in the PC. To load the expression in another project, click

Load

. A selection dialog is displayed. Select the expression in the drop-down list and click

OK

.

If you have saved expressions to the library that you want to remove, click

Delete

and select among the saved expressions in a dialog. Expressions included when installing iX Developer are not listed, since these cannot be deleted.

4.11.4

Limitations

An expression is executed only on

read

, i.e. when the value is changed in the controller.

When writing a value (from e.g. an analog numeric tag), the expression is not executed.

If another tag than the original tag is used in the expression, the expression is not triggered on its value change.

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

If an expression that is used in more than one location is either renamed or deleted, references will not be updated. A build error will be given.

Expressions can be used for all data connections except for actions the Property grid recipe item tags current language tag in Multiple languages configuration trigger tags index tags scheduler tags dynamic text for alarm items

Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

118

4.12 Data Exchange

Data exchange between different controllers is supported; also between controllers of different brands. The data exchange can be performed when a digital tag is set, or at a certain time interval. Data exchange can be selected for individual tags, array tags or for the complete range of tags.

Note:

The data exchange function is isolated from general tag/controller settings. For example, a tag assigned read access only for the operator, may still be read and written by the data exchange function.

Follow the steps below to set up data exchange with three different controllers involved:

1. Select the

Controllers

tab of the tags configuration page and enter short names for the controllers in the ID column, and make sure that all controllers are active.

Tags

2. Select the

Tags

tab and check

Data Exchange

to display the Direction and

When columns.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

119

3. Select an address that is represented in all of the controllers.

Tags

If an array tag is selected, the complete address range corresponding to the array size will be exchanged:

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

120

4. Click

...

in the Direction column to set up the direction of the data exchange.

Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

121

5. Add a trigger tag on the Triggers tab with time interval for data exchange or use a tag, which when greater than 0, will trigger the data exchange.

Alternatively, set up a trigger that includes both value change and a time interval.

Tags

6. Return to the Tags tab and select which trigger to use.

Triggers

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

Related information

122

4.13 Importing and Exporting Tags

Tags can be imported to and exported from an iX Developer project, to, for example, be edited in Excel or a text editor, or to be transferred to another project.

The complete tag list may be imported and exported, or the actions can be based on connected controllers.

The import function also allows selecting individual tags for import.

4.13.1

Handling Columns

The import function allows skipping columns, or binding columns in the import file to any column in the Tags configuration page.

The

Name

and

DataType

columns must always be bound.

A column may only be bound once.

4.13.2

Saving the Import Configuration

For repetitive import actions the import configuration, e.g. how columns are bound and from which row to start the import, can be saved and reused. The import configuration is saved by clicking the

Save mapping as import module

button prior to performing the import. Next time the Import Tags dialog is opened, the configuration is available from the

Import module

drop-down list.

Saving import configurations is valid only for files in text or Excel format.

Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

123

4.13.3

Tag Import Example

If the controller in the project is changed to a system with other names for the tags used, these must be changed:

1. Click on

Tags

in the Project Explorer.

2. Click on the arrow to the right of the

Import/Export

button to display the available options of import and export operations.

Tags

3. Select

Export tags

from the desired controller to export the list to a text file or an Excel sheet. Enter a file name and browse to a location. Define how the to separate the columns and which columns to export. Use the arrows if you want to change position of the columns.

4. Click

Export

.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

124

5. Open the text file in a text editor or a spread sheet application.

Tags

6. Change all current tags to corresponding tags used in the new controller, and save the file.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

125

7.

Select

Import tags

to the desired controller and browse to the updated file. If desired, select a row from which to start the import. It is possible to rebind columns before importing to the project, and to exclude columns.

These settings can be saved by clicking the

Save mapping as import module

button, and will then be made available for selection from the Import module drop-down list at next import.

Tags

8. Click

Import

. It is now possible to deselect import of some tags.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

126

9. In case there are name conflicts, these can be handled by changing the name, overwriting, merging or skipping conflicting items. The actions taken are saved to a log file for future reference.

Tags

Note:

If you select

Overwrite

, all settings for the existing tag will be overwritten. If you select

Merge

, existing actions for the tag will be kept.

The imported tags are now added to the current project.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

127

4.13.4

Importing Tags from the Command

Line

Tags can also be added to the current iX Developer project using a command line switch, by entering

[Executable file] “Project location]\[Project name].neoproj”/ImportTags=”[Tag file location]\Tag file”

. In this case, no application window is displayed, as long as the import is successful.

Example in Windows XP

To open the project named Test1 with the tag file VarFile.txt in the directory

C:\MyProjects, run iX Developer from the command line with the following arguments:

NeoIDE.exe “C:\MyProjects\Test1\Test1.neoproj” /ImportTags=“C:\MyProjects\VarFile.txt”

In Windows Vista, the complete path (within quotes) to the executable file has to be included.

Removing Existing Controller Tags at Import

The

/ImportTags

command line switch may be used together with the switch

/RemoveTagsNotInFile

. This will remove all existing tags in the controller that are not included in the import file.

Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

128

4.14 Filtering Tags

A selection of tags can be displayed using the Filter Builder. Several conditions can be used, and the different values/operators that can be used for making conditions are displayed when clicking on the condition building blocks.

Operands and operator nodes are context sensitive. Name strings are not case sensitive. Values in the filter builder are saved individually for each function during an edit session. A filter is built as a logical expression tree. A filter typically has operations on individual column values as leaf nodes and logical operators serve as main nodes.

Perform the following steps to create a filter:

1. Click on

Tags

in the Project Explorer.

The tag list is displayed in the desktop area.

2. Select

Show Selection

from the Show Selection/Show All button to build a filter.

It is also possible to filter tags depending on tag name by typing in the

Filter

box.

The filtering affects the tags list directly as letters are entered in the box.

Tags

Only tags including “te” in their names are displayed

The filter indication when having entered “te” in the Filter box

Related information

Filtering Items

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

129

4.15 Tag Format

The following tag formats (data types) are available in the dialog for a tag, provided that the selected driver or OPC server supports the tag format.

Format

Bit

Bit

Signed 16-bit

Unsigned 16-bit

Signed 32-bit

Unsigned 32-bit

Float with exponent,

64-bit

Float with exponent,

32-bit

Data type

DEFAULT

BIT

BOOL

INT16

UINT16

INT32

UINT32

DOUBLE

FLOAT

Treated as INT16

0 and 1

Values can be “false” (0) or “true” (1) 1

-32,768 – +32,767

0 – +65,535

-2,147,483,648 – +2,147,483,647

2

0 – +4,294,967,295 2

1.7E308

1

±3.4E38

1

Range

7 x Signed 16-bit DATETIME An Analog Numeric object can present the time format

1

. Syntax

3

:

<yyyy-MM-dd hh:mm:ss>

7 consecutive registers are used to store a time:

Dx

, seconds, 0-59

Dx+1

, minutes, 0-59

Dx+2

, hours, 0-23

Dx+3

, day, 1-31

Dx+4

, month, 1-12

Dx+5

, year, 100-9999

Dx+6

, weekday, 1-7

String STRING Storing character strings in tags. For this data type, size can be selected.

1. Controller representation for this type is dependent on the driver software.

2. Regarding resolution of values in 32-bit format: both iX Developer and the operator panel can handle up to six decimal digits of an integer 32-bit value. Remaining digits will be truncated or changed into zeros.

3.

yyyy

=year,

MM

=month,

dd

=date,

hh

=hour,

mm

=minute,

ss

=second.

Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

130

For use in script code, the following table shows the type representation in C#.

This is used when there is a need to do a type casting, for example in calculations that are using overloaded operators.

C# type

uint bool int uint int uint float double

DateTime string

Data type

DEFAULT

BIT

BOOL

INT16

UINT16

INT32

UINT32

FLOAT

DOUBLE

DATETIME

STRING

Description

Treated as INT16

C# does not have a “bit” type. In the controller this is a bit.

C# bool type that can have the values “false” (0) and “true” (1)

16 bit, -32,768 – +32,767

16 bit, 0 – +65,535

32 bit, -2,147,483,648 – +2,147,483,647

32 bit, 0 – +4,294,967,295

32 bit, ±3.4E38

64 bit, ±1.7E308

7 elements are used to store a time

Storing character strings in tags

Related information

Script

Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

131

4.16 Aliases

An alias should be treated as a property of a screen and can act as a stand-in for a tag. The alias can be used to reference a tag wherever that tag can be referenced directly. When used, iX Developer will act the same as if the original tag had been used. Each screen using aliases can be configured with a different instance different tag references.

Using aliases will enable reuse of screens without having to create a new duplicated screen.

4.16.1

Creating Aliases

Aliases are handled by clicking

Aliases

on the desktop view mode tab.

Tags

Desktop view mode tabs

Clicking the

Add

button adds an alias to the list. Make settings for each added alias. When predefined values are available, these can be selected by clicking the arrow at the right of the table cell.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

132

Basic Settings

Enter

Alias name

and

Default value

for the alias. If no default value is entered, the alias will be treated as a local screen variable.

Parameter

Alias Name

Default Value

Data Type

Description

Symbolic name. The name can be any alphanumeric string, beginning with a letter (a-z, A-Z).

Selection of tags to create aliases of. If no tag is selected the alias will be treated as a local screen variable.

The

default value

will be the default value for the alias in the created instances. It will also be the reference for the default instance. See

Instances

.

Selection of data type. This setting is enabled by first clicking the Data Type checkbox.

The data type will by default reflect the data type of the selected Default Value.

Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

133

4.16.2

Instances

The aliases created in the project are presented in a table on the instances tab. It is possible to change the value for the aliases in this tab, in order to override the default value configured in the aliases tab.

If a value for an alias is changed in the instances tab, the new value is displayed with bold text to indicate that it differs from the alias’

default value

.

To revert back to the

default value

, delete the value followed by pressing [

Enter

].

The

default value

can be changed in the aliases tab.

Tags

Parameter

Instance

Aliases

Description

Symbolic name. The name can be any alphanumeric string, beginning with a letter (a-z, A-Z).

The names of all aliases created in the project will be displayed in the columns headers. The values connected to the aliases will be listed in each columns.

Using the “Show Screen” Action with Instances

The "

Show Screen

” action can be used to display a specific screen. For screens that have aliases, it is also possible to select which instance of the screen to use, and thereby also which set of tags to assign to the screen’s aliases.

The

Default

option is a virtual instance configured with the alias’ default values.

“

Show Screen

” Action Parameters.

Related information

Action Groups

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

134

Limitations

Aliases do not support array tags.

Aliases can not be used in connection with expressions.

Aliases can not be used with the Trend Viewer object.

No scripting support for valuechanged event on an alias.

Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

135

Controller

5 Controller

Operator panels can be connected to many types of automation equipment, such as PLCs, servos, and drives.

The expression

controller

is used as a general term for the connected equipment.

It is possible to connect a tag to more than one controller simultaneously.

This makes it possible to use the same application with different controllers.

Controllers can be enabled and disabled in runtime. A project can contain multiple controller connections.

A project can also be connected to an external OPC server.

Related information

Multiple Controllers

External OPC Server

Internal Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

136

Controller

5.1

Adding a Controller

When a new project is created, one of the steps is to choose which controller brand and model to connect to. Clicking on

Tags

in the Project Explorer, selecting the

Controller

tab displays the Controller configuration page.

Name

Parameter

ID

Active

Description

Symbolic name. The name can be any alphanumeric string, beginning with a letter (a-z, A-Z).

Optional short name for controller; displayed in functions such as Data exchange.

Selection of which controllers are to be active in runtime.

Change of active controllers can also be performed in runtime using an action or script.

Controllers are added and deleted using the

Add

and

Delete

buttons.

Clicking

Controller

allows selecting another brand for the selected controller, and

Settings

displays settings for the selected driver.

Clicking

Help

in the driver settings dialog opens the help file for the driver.

Related information

Select Controller

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

137

Controller

5.1.1

Notify Window

If a communication error between the application and the controller is detected in runtime, this will result in a communication error, and a Notify Window will be displayed in the operator panel. The Notify Window is a floating window that starts in the upper left corner of the screen. It is also used to display the alarm indicator.

The Notify Window can be moved to any position on the current screen.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

138

Controller

5.2 DEMO Controller

The DEMO controller is used and selected in the same way as a regular controller driver, to design and test a project directly on the development PC without connection to an external controller.

A number of predefined tags can be selected:

Data type

BIT, BOOL

INT16, UINT16

M0 - M99

D0 - D99

Tag ID Description

Digital tags

Analog tags

The DEMO controller also includes counters and digital tags with predefined functions:

BIT

INT16

Data type Tag ID

M100-M104

C0-C4

Description

Toggles OFF and ON every

1,000 ms

Counts from 0 to 100 with 1,000 ms interval by default; min/max values can be defined

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

139

Controller

5.3 External OPC Server

OPC is an industrial standard created in a collaboration of automation hardware and software suppliers. The standard defines methods for exchanging real-time automation data between PC-based clients using Microsoft operating systems.

An OPC server acts as a controller towards an operator panel.

5.3.1

OPC Classic Client

Settings for the OPC Classic client is made in the

Choose Controller

dialog.

Select

Localhost

when accessing an OPC server running in your local PC.

Select

Remote Server

when accessing an OPC server in the network environment, and type the IP address of the OPC server, or click

Browse

to select the OPC server. Clicking

Refresh

makes it possible to select the OPC server from the OPC

Server drop-down list next time.

Add OPC server tags by clicking the small arrow at the right-hand side of the

Add

button on the Tags tab:

To validate tags from a remote OPC server in the iX Developer project, return to the Controllers tab and select the remote OPC server once more, and click

OK

.

This procedure is necessary as the tags in the remote OPC server may have been changed since they were selected on the Tags tab.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

140

5.3.2

OPC UA Client

Settings for the OPC UA client can be made in the

Choose Controller

dialog.

Open the dialog by clicking the

Add

button on the Controllers tab.

Enter the URL to the

OPC UA

server.

Controller Settings Dialog

The settings dialog for the OPC UA Server is available by clicking the

Settings

button on the Controllers tab.

Controller

URL

Parameter

Authentication settings

Namespace settings

Tag View settings

Description

Enter URL to the UPC UA server.

Only UA TCP Binary is supported which means the URL must start with “opc.tcp://”

Choose whether to use anonymous login or enter a user name and password to enable a secured login.

This setting offers a possibility to declare a namespace URI and bind it to a prefix.

Namespace separator character

: Enter a character to be used to separate the namespace URI prefix from the tag ID when presented on the tag tab.

Default namespace

: Select the default namespace URI prefix to be used when entering a tag on the tag tab.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

141

Add Tags from OPC UA Server

Add OPC UA server tags by clicking the

Add

button on the Tags tab.

Enter the Tag ID along with the preferred namespace URI prefix, defined in the controller settings dialog. Make sure to separate the values with the separator character.

Example: “

NS3:tag

” .

The Tag ID, in the example above, corresponds with

BrowseName

in the OPC

UA server.

If no namespace URI prefix is entered, the default namespace URI prefix as defined in the controller settings dialog will be used.

No prefix is needed when connecting to an iX server.

Controller

Note:

Array tags are not supported by OPC UA controllers.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

142

Controller

Supported Functions

Data Access (UA part 8) is supported.

All variables of data types that are used in iX Developer is supported. Read / write of objects, structs and arrays is not supported.

Limitations

Limitation

Browsing

Address input in GUI

Description

Browsing of servers / nodes is not supported.

NameSpace

and

BrowseName

is used to identify a variable in the server.

If this combination is not unique, the client cannot identify the variable.

This is not a problem when connecting to an iX server, since all tag names (variables) are unique.

Related information

OPC UA Server

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

143

Controller

5.4 Updating Drivers

Drivers can be updated via Internet or from file.

Each driver takes up approximately 500 kB. To use the downloaded drivers, iX

Developer must be restarted.

5.4.1

Updating Drivers from Internet

A web browser is not required to update drivers via an Internet connection. A list of drivers that can be downloaded via Internet is displayed when the connection is established.

1. Click on the iX Developer button and select

Update Drivers /From Internet

to update available drivers to the latest version, or to install new drivers.

The list shows the version number for the available drivers and the version number for the installed drivers.

2. Select the driver(s) to install in iX Developer.

The command

Mark Newer

selects all drivers available in newer versions than the ones installed, including all drivers that are not installed.

3. Click

Download

.

Related information

File Menu

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

144

Controller

5.4.2

Updating Drivers from File

When updating drivers from file only one driver at the time is updated. This can for example be used to revert to an older driver.

To install a new driver from file:

1. Click on the iX Developer button and select

Update Drivers /From File

to update available drivers to the latest version.

2. Browse to the folder where the driver files are located.

A list of all drivers that can be installed is now shown.

3. Select the driver to install in iX Developer.

Mark Newer

selects the driver when there is a newer version than the currently installed.

4. Click

Install

.

Related information

File Menu

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

145

Controller

5.5 Synchronizing the Controller Clock

In order to synchronize the controller clock with the iX Developer project, the system tags hour, minute, second, need to be added to the project from the Tags configuration page. These are then connected to addresses in the controller.

When the value is changed in any of the system tags, they will be written to the controller.

Related information

System Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

146

Web Server

6 Web Server

The Web Server adds the possibility to use a server-side Application Programming

Interface (API) to interact with a running project. The API operates over the

HyperText Transfer Protocol (HTTP) and can be accessed from any compatible device. In addition, the web server can host web pages and related media to be consumed by web browsers.

The bundled Javascript Software Development Kit (SDK) makes it easy to build interactive web pages that utilize the API.

Login settings for the web server are available from Server group on the System ribbon tab.

6.1 Web Server Configuration

6.1.1

Web Site Configuration

For the web server to be able to host web pages, the content of the web site must be transferred using FTP to a folder named “WebSite” residing in the FTP root directory.

The FTP server must be enabled and the web content can only be transferred after the application has been deployed and started on the panel.

6.1.2

Login Form

The web server provides a default login form that is used for clients to authenticate. It is also possible to override the default and provide a custom web page that matches your overall design.

To override the login form, create an HTML file called “login.html” and place it in a folder named “Website” in the root of the FTP root directory.

This file will be used instead of the default when clients access the address “

/login

”.

The Javascript SDK provides tools for creating the form using a few conventions.

Note that this only applies if you have authentication enabled in the web server settings.

Authentication Script

Reference the authentication script

Username and Password Field

Mark the username and password field with the predefined id’s “

ix-username

“ and “

ix-password

”:

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

147

Web Server

Login Button

Mark a login button with the predefined id “

ix-login

”. Any element can be used.

Invalid Credentials

Optionally add an element with the predefined id “

ix-invalid-credentials

” that will be shown if the login fails.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

148

Web Server

6.2 Javascript SDK

6.2.1

Javascript SDK Overview

The JavaScript SDK provides a rich set of client-side functionality for accessing the server-side API calls. This enables the possibility to build highly interactive web pages that uses tags defined in the project.

1. The first step to build an interactive web page is to reference the SDK by inserting the following script into to the header of the html.

Note:

The SDK is bundled with jQuery 1.7 (

http://jquery.com/

).

2. Next, the SDK needs to be initialized. In its simples form the following lines need to be added after the reference to the SDK:

This will make it possible to use the defined tag metadata attributes to incorporate the project tags into the web page.

The following line will, for example, insert the value of Tag1 into the html document:

Tag Value or Properties

To insert the current value of a tag or tag property into a html element, the

data-ix-tag

attribute can be used. The value of the attribute should be the name of the tag as defined in the project and the property of a tag. Separate the names with a dot “.”.

If no property is provided, the value of the tag is used.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

149

Web Server

Formatting

Formatting of a tag value can be applied to a tag of numeric type or a datetime. The format is defined using the

data-ix-format

attribute.

The following table describes the custom date and time format specifiers and displays a result string produced by each format specifier.

z

W

F l

Tag value

d

D j

S w m

M n t

L

Y

Description

The day of the month, from 01 through 31.

The abbreviated name of the day of the week (in english)

The day of the month, from 1 through 31

The full name of the day of the week

Ordinal number for the date of the month

(eg -st, -nd, -rd, -th etc)

Day of the week as a number.

Day of the year

Week of the year

The full name of the month.

Gets the day of the month from 00 to 31

The abbreviated name of the month.

The month of the year

1 to 12

Number of days in the month

Is leap year, 1 if true, otherwise 0

The year as a four-digit number.

Result

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> 07

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> Tue

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> 7

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> Tuesday

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> th

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> 2

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> 37

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> 05

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM->

February

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> 02

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> Feb

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> 2

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> 29

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> 1

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> 2012

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

150

Web Server

i

Tag value

y a

A g

G h

H s

X

O

Z q

Description

The year, from 00 to

99

The AM/PM designator lower case.

The AM/PM designator upper case.

The hour, using a

12-hour clock from

1 to 12.

The hour, using a

24-hour clock from

0 to 23.

The hour, using a

12-hour clock from

01 to 12.

The hour, using a

24-hour clock from

00 to 23.

The minute, from 00 through 59

The second, from 00 through 59.

The milliseconds, from 000 through 999.

Hours offset from

GMT, with a leading zero for a single-digit value.

Timezone offset, in seconds

Quarter

Result

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> 12

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> pm

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> PM

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> 12

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> 12

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> 12

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> 12

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> 27

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> 24

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> 000

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> +0100

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> 3600

Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM-> 1

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

151

Web Server

The following table describes the custom numeric format specifiers and displays sample output produced by each format specifier:

Tag

Value

0 Digit

Description

#

Result

Value: 4, Format: 00 -> 04

Value: 4.5, Format: 0.00 -> 4.50

Value: .1, Format: 0.00e00 -> 1.00e-01

Value: 4, Format: ## -> 4

.

E

,

Digit, zero shows as absent

Decimal separator or monetary decimal separator

Separates mantissa and exponent in scientific notation

Grouping separator

Value: 4.5, Format: 0.00 -> 4.50

Value: 5.55, Format: 0.0E+00 -> 5.6E+00

Value: 1000000, Format: 0.0E+00 -> 1.0E+06

;

[]

Separates positive and negative subpatterns

Custom subpatterns

Value: 1000, Format: 0,0 -> 1,000

Value: 1000, Format: 0,# -> 1,000

Value: -5, Format: plus;minus -> minus

Value: 5, Format: plus;minus -> plus

Value: 0, Format: plus;minus;zero -> zero

Value: -5, Format: 0;(0.0);0.000 -> (5.0)

Value: 700, Format:

[>500]###.##;[<1000]###;###.# -> 700.00

Value: 400, Format:

[>500]medium;[>1000]###;###.# -> 400

Value: 1001, Format: [>2000]high;[>1000] normal;[>500]low -> normal

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

152

Web Server

Setting Tag Value

To set the value of a tag, two elements must be defined.

The first element have the

data-ix-setter

attribute on the position where the tag value can be entered.

The second element has the

data-ix-submitbutton

attribute used to submit the new tag value.

The

data-ix-submitbutton

attribute takes the tag names, separated by comma

“,”, to be submitted when the button is clicked. To submit all tags an asterisk “*” can be used.

iX-invalid Style

Basic validation is done on input values. If the value cannot be assigned to the Tag then the value will not be set. To indicate an invalid value the framework will set the CSS class “ix-invalid” on the element. This can then be used to provide the user with visual cues of the invalid state. For example, the following CSS snippet adds a red border around the input when the input is incorrect:

Refresh Modes

To control how tag values are refreshed, the

data-ix-refresh

attribute can be used with elements defined with

data-ix-tag

or

data-ix-setter

.

It is recommended to use the least frequent interval that is required by your project.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

153

Web Server

Advanced iX.setup

After loading the JavaScript SDK, call iX.setup to initialize the framework. This will wire the tag metadata attributes that you have defined in html and will start periodical polling if this is needed.

Parameters:

Name options

Options:

Type

Object

Description

See the “Options” table below.

Property refreshInterval refreshMode refreshModeSetter

Type

Int

String

String

Description

The refresh interval of tag values in ms. For performance reasons it is recommended not to use low values for this setting.

Overrides the default refresh mode of tag values.

Accepted modes are:

onetime

,

interval

.

none

,

Overrides the default refresh mode of tag setters.

Accepted modes are:

onetime

,

interval

.

none

,

Argument

Optional

Optional

Optional

Default

5000

onetime onetime

Example:

This example will set periodical refresh interval to 10 seconds, set the refresh mode of html elements marked with the

data-ix-tag

attribute to interval and set the refresh mode of html elements marked with the

data-ix-setter

attribute to refresh only once.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

154

Web Server

iX.refreshElements

Refreshes the tag values of the provided elements manually. The attribute data-ix-refreshbutton can be used to achieve the same function.

Note:

Only an element that have been marked with a valid data-ix-tag or data-ix-setter can be refreshed. The value will be refreshed regardless of the refresh mode set on the element.

Parameters:

Name elementIds

Array

Type Description

A list of strings containing the html element ids. If not provided all tag elements are updated.

Example:

This example show how you programmatically can achieve the same behavior as marking an element with

data-ix-refreshbutton

. In the example, the html element with id "tag1Id" will be updated when the element with id "refreshButton" is clicked. This example uses jQuery (bundled with iX.js) to bind to the click event of the "refreshButton"

In html:

In Javascript:

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

155

Web Server

iX.refreshTags

Refreshes the tag values of the provided tag names manually.

Note:

Only tags used in conjunction with data-ix-tag or data-ix-setter or created by iX.createTag can be refreshed.

Parameters:

Name tagName

Type

String

Description

(Optional) A list of strings containing the names of the tags to refresh. If not provided all defined tags are refreshed.

Example:

This example show how to programmatically refresh the tag values of "tag1" and

"tag2". When refreshButton is clicked the "tag1" and "tag2" will be refreshed even if the refresh mode was set to 'none' when creating the tag.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

156

Web Server

iX.createTag

Creates a representation of a server-side tag on the client-side.

Parameters: tagName

Name valueRefreshedCallback refreshMode

Type

String

Function

String

Description

The name of the tag in the project to create a connection to.

Optional: Function that is called when the tag value has changed. The function is not called when the tag value is the same as last checked.

Function may take two optional parameters. The first parameter is the tag that changed the value, the second the old values of the tag before it changed.

Optional: Overrides the default refresh mode of tag. Accepted modes are:

none

,

onetime

,

interval

.

Note that the more frequent refreshMode is always used. For example, if the tag is created with

onetime

but an element defines

data-ix-refreshmode=”interval”

for the same tag then the tag will have a refreshMode of

interval

.

Returns: iX.Tag

Type Description

An instance of iX.Tag. See

Tag Class

for a complete description.

Example:

This example show how to display a warning if the value of "tag1" exceeds 70. The example is using jQuery (bundled with iX.js) to hide and show the warning box.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

157

Web Server

iX.getTag

Retrieves a tag by name.

Parameters:

Name tagName

String

Type Description

The name of the tag to retrieve.

Returns: iX.Tag

Type Description

An instance of

iX.Tag

. See

Tag Class

for a complete description.

Example:

This example shows how to retrieve a instance of a tag after it has been created.

"tag1" and "tag1Again" will refer to the same tag instance.

iX.commitTagValue

Commits any unsaved tag values that was changed using

iX.Tag.setValue

for the provided tag names.

Parameters:

Name tagNames

Array

Type Description

(Optional) A list of strings containing the names of the tags to commit. If not provided all defined tags are committed.

Example:

This example show how to commit changes to tag values on the server in a batch.

Note that the value must match the data type of the tag on the server.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

158

Web Server

Tag Class

iX.Tag

is a class representing a Tag. The methods and properties of a Tag must be accessed through an instance of

iX.Tag

and not the class itself. Typically a Tag instance obtained using

iX.createTag

or

iX.getTag

methods.

iX.Tag Properties

Name isDirty tagProperties value

Bool

Type

Object

Flexible

Description

Flag indicating if the local value has been changed.

An object with data retrieved from the server. See tag metadata below. Note that these are only available after the first refresh. Also, only value is refreshed not all of the metadata.

The value of the tag. The type of the value depends on the data type in the project.

Never use this property to set the value.

Tag Properties:

Name controllers description dataType initialValue readonly quality

Array

Type

String

String

Flexible

Bool

String

Description

An array of controller names that the tag is connected to.

The tag description, null if not defined.

The tag

dataType

, e.g

int16

,

datetime

,

default

The initial value of the tag, null if not defined.

True if the tag is read only, otherwise false

Indicates the quality of the tag value:

Unknown

,

Good

,

Bad

iX.Tag.setValue

Set the tag value manually. To commit the value to the server side call

iX.commit

.

It’s vital that the value that is set corresponds to the data type of the tag.

Parameter:

Name newValue

Type

Flexible

Description

The new value. Must match the data type of the tag.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

159

Web Server

iX.Tag.subscribeToChange

Adds a callback that is called when the server-side value has changed.

Parameter:

Name fn

Type

Function

Description

The callback to register

iX.Tag.unsubscribeToChange

Unsubscribe from changes.

fn

Name Type

Function

Description

The same callback that was used with

iX.Tag.subscribeToChange

iX.Tag.refresh

Refreshes this tag. It is recommended to refresh tags in batch (using

iX.refresh

) instead of refreshing individual tags.

iX.Tag.commit

Commit this tags value if the value has been changed. It is recommended to commit tags in batch (using

iX.commit

) instead of refreshing individual tags.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

160

Web Server

6.3 Web Service API

6.3.1

RESTful Web Service API

iX Developer provides an API for interacting with tags. The tags can be read or written to using the HTTP verbs

GET

,

PUT

and

POST

.

GET

to read tags,

PUT

to set the value of a tag or

POST

to perform batch operation.

6.3.2

General

Accepted Types

It is possible to negotiate which media type that will be returned as a representation of the resource being retrieved. Use the Accept header in the request to specify the desired media type. text/html and application/json media types are understood as response formats for tag related resources.

A client request providing an unsupported media type will be responded with the following message: “406 - Not understood”.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

161

Web Server

6.3.3

REST API

Tags Resource

Lists tags available in the project.

Verbs:

Uri:

GET

/Tags

Tags Resource Example

Tag Resource

Resource for interacting with individual tags. To perform multiple operations on tags it is recommended to use

TagBatch

resource instead.

Verbs:

Uri:

GET params:

PUT params:

GET, PUT

/tags/:name

Name:

Time

The name of the tag, e.g., Tag1 SystemTagDate-

Name:

Time

The name of the tag, e.g., Tag1 SystemTagDate-

Value:

The value to set the tag to, e.g., 12, "foo"

Tag Resource Example

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

162

Web Server

TagBatch Resource

The

TagBatch

resource is a resource used to perform batch operations on tags.

Verbs:

Uri:

POST params:

POST

/tagbatch

includeMetadata

: boolean indicating if only the tag value or the full tag metadata should be fetched getTags: List of tag names to return setTags: List name, value pairs representing new tag values.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

163

TagBatch Resource Example

Web Server

Note:

The returned value (

initialValue

) for tags of datetime type is presented in the ISO8601 format.

Example:

"2008-09-22T14:01:54.9571247Z".

Dates are always returned in UTC, Coordinated Universal Time.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

164

7 Objects

Static and dynamic objects that can be included in screens are available for selection from the Objects control group of the Home ribbon tab.

Objects

Not all objects are visible in the normal view, but are made available by scrolling.

Clicking the expand button displays all the objects, categorized into groups.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

165

An object can be created by clicking on it in the Objects group and then clicking on the screen, or by dragging it from the Objects group and dropping it on the screen. This creates the object with default size and appearance.

Dragging the object handles resizes it. Object appearance can be modified using the commands in the Format and Font control groups, but also by the controls on the Dynamics ribbon tab.

Settings for a selected object can be managed with the control groups on the

General ribbon tab, and actions can be configured from the Actions ribbon tab.

It is possible to select a style to be used as the default style next time the same kind of object is added.

Related information

Default Appearance

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

166

7.1 Blinking Objects

Some objects can be displayed as blinking objects. Blinking is enabled for each object individually using the Property Grid.

Objects

Parameter

BlinkInterval

Description

Time in ms from when the object gets invisible one time until it gets invisible the next time. For operator panel projects, the minimum value is 400 ms, and it is recommended to use a blink interval of a multiple of 400 ms to ensure a harmonic blink experience (400 ms, 800 ms,

1200 ms, 1600 ms etc.). For PC targets, the minimum value is 200 ms. The default value is 1200 ms for all targets, and the maximum value is 10,000 ms for all targets.

Checking the box makes the object blink IsBlinkEnabled

Security has higher priority than blink, and an object hidden by security cannot be made visible through blink.

The properties related to the blink function can be bound to tags using the Blink control on the Dynamics ribbon tab. This makes it possible to enable and disable blinking, and to change blink frequency based on a tag value.

Related information

General Group

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

167

7.1.1

Limitations for Operator Panel

Targets

Blink is not supported for the following objects in operator panel targets:

Alarm Distributor Viewer

Alarm Viewer

Audit Trail Viewer

Database Viewer

Media Player

Pdf Viewer

Web Browser

Check Box

Combo Box

Group Box

List Box

Progress Bar

Radio Button

Related information

General Group

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

168

7.2 Shapes

Static shapes such as Line, Rectangle and Poly Line can be used to draw background graphics. Tags can be linked to shapes under Dynamics, to change their appearance (e.g. color and position) depending on value changes of controller tags.

Points for an existing Poly Line object can be adjusted by selecting

Edit Points

from the context menu.

Line Rectangle

Objects

Ellipse Polyline

Note:

Bevel for Poly Line and Ellipse is only supported for projects designed for PC targets.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

169

7.3 HMI Controls

Dynamic objects such as buttons, analog numerics, sliders, meters and trend viewers are linked to tags in order to create control and monitoring functions.

The tag associated with an object can be selected and changed from the

Tag/Security group on the Home or General ribbon tabs, or from the context menu. Links to tags (controller tags, internal tags or system tags) are selected in the Tag drop-down list.

Objects containing text can be edited directly from the keyboard, either when just created, or when a single selection is done on the text area of the object.

It is also possible to use script code to control the text contents of buttons, texts or text boxes.

The following HMI controls are described:

Action Menu Object

Circular Meter Object

Roller Panel Object

Objects

Alarm Viewer Object

Chart Object

Slider Object

Analog Numeric Object

Database Viewer Object

Text Object

Animated GIF

Digital Clock Object

Touch Combo Box Object

Animated Label Object

Linear Meter Object

Touch List Box Object

Audit Trail Viewer

Button Object

Multi Picture Object

Trend Viewer Object

Picture Object

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

170

7.3.1

Action Menu Object

The Action menu object is used to display multiple menu groups, each containing its own sets of actions which can be triggered in iX Runtime from the action menu object.

Settings for the Action Menu object are available from the General ribbon tab while the object is selected:

Settings Group

Parameter

Edit Actions

View type

Item Width

Item Height

Orientation

Picture Width

Picture Height

ScrollBar Width

Description

Opens the Edit Actions dialog

Choose between Bar, Expand and Tab

Set the width of the items. This is only available for the Bar and Expand View types.

Set the height of the items

Set the orientation of the items. This is only available for the Bar View type.

Set the width of the pictures for the items

Set the height of the pictures for the items

Set the width of the scroll bar.

Touch Settings Group

Parameter

Scroll Sensitivity

Description

Set the sensitivity of the scroll. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 10.

Edit Actions Dialog

The Actions tab in the Edit Actions dialog contains the following properties:

Text

Parameter

Picture

Make Transparent

Action

Description

The text to be displayed for the item

The picture to be displayed for the item

Set transparency on the item

Configure the action when the item is clicked

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

171

The Menu Groups tab in the Edit Actions dialog contains the following properties:

Parameter

Menu Group Name

Picture

Make Transparent

Description

The name of the menu group

The picture to be displayed for the menu group

Set transparency on the menu group

Note:

Make sure not to use semi-transparent pictures in projects targeted for operator panels. Since these targets do not fully support opacity, semi-transparent pictures may turn out unclear.

Adding a New Action

In the

Edit Actions

dialog select the Actions tab. Click the

Add

button. A new item will be added and placed last in the list. To configure the actions for the item, click the “…” button in the Action column.

Adding a New Menu Group

In the

Edit Actions

dialog select the Menu Groups tab. Click the

Add

button. A new menu group will be added and placed last in the list. The menu group will be displayed in the Actions tab as a new menu group tab.

Action Menu Dynamics

It is also possible to set dynamics, i.e. tag dependent values for the Action Menu properties. These can be found in the Dynamics tab in the ribbon bar.

Related information

Dynamics Ribbon Tab

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

172

7.3.2

Alarm Viewer Object

The Alarm Viewer is used to display and manage alarm items, for example indication of out-of-bounds tag values. The viewer consists of a list area and a button area.

Related information

Alarm Management

Alarm Viewer

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

173

7.3.3

Analog Numeric Object

The Analog Numeric object displays a box with a numeric or alphanumeric value.

The value can be connected to a tag.

Settings for the analog numeric object are available from the General ribbon tab while the object is selected:

Display Format Group

Type

Parameter

Number of Decimals

Limit Characters to

Zero Fill

Description

Selection of Integer, Decimal, String, Hex or Binary display format

Maximum number of decimals to display in the object.

Only available when Type = Decimal. The number of decimals will be represented by a “#” symbol on the analog numeric object.

Makes it possible to maximize the number of displayed characters. The number of characters will be represented by a “#” symbol on the analog numeric object.

Fills empty character positions with zeros, to let the maximum number of characters always be displayed

Objects

Note:

The “

Limit Characters to

” function, in combination with the string format type is not supported for the Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese and Simplified Chinese

(Compact) languages.

Prefix/Suffix Group

Parameter

Prefix/Suffix

Description

Text value that will precede/follow the object value

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

174

Tag/Security Group

Parameter

Select Tag

Select Security Groups

Select Visibility

Description

Connection to a tag from the tags configuration page

Allows limiting access of the object based on security groups. If left empty, the object can be accessed by anyone.

Configuration of visibility:

Default

: The visibility specified on the General tab of the

Security Manager is used.

Disabled

: The object is disabled for users with insufficient access rights

Hidden

: The object is invisible for users with insufficient access rights

Normal

: The object looks normal also for users with insufficient access rights

Format Group

Parameter

Auto Stretch Font

Disable Operator Input

Transparent

Description

Resizes the font to fit the height of the object. Default setting for the analog numeric object.

Disables input in runtime

Makes the object transparent, i.e. makes the frame and background color invisible

Text Alignment Group

Parameter

Horizontal/Vertical

Description

Adjusts the object horizontally or vertically

Validation Group

Parameter

On Input

On Display

Lower Limit/Upper

Limit

Description

Input values are validated, based on Lower Limit and

Upper Limit, when the box is checked

Background color changes according to Other Colors on the

Format tab if upper or lower limit are violated, when the box is checked

Minimum/maximum value that can be entered in runtime when

On Input

is checked, or that will change the background color of the object when

On Display

is checked

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

175

Objects

Note:

The font size of the analog numeric object is auto-sized when resizing the object frame by default, and is not adjusted in the Font control of the Home ribbon tab. Uncheck

Auto Stretch Font

in the Text group first, and then change the font size on the Home ribbon tab.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

176

7.3.4

Animated GIF

The Animated GIF (Graphics Interchange Format) object allows including a moving graphic picture in the iX Developer project. Animated GIFs can be imported to the project by browsing the PC environment for graphic files. Imported animated GIFs are added to the Project Picture folder in the

Component Library.

The Animated GIF can be connected to a tag which controls animation. When the value of the connected tag is 0, then animation is turned off and the picture is displayed static in its initial design. An Animated GIF not connected to a tag runs animated continuously.

Settings for the Animated GIF object are available from the General ribbon tab while the object is selected:

Settings Group

Parameter

Change Picture

Reset Picture

Stretch

Transparent

Description

Opens a browse dialog for selection of picture

Restores original height and width to picture

Adapts height and width to the selection frame when resizing the picture

Makes the object transparent, i.e. makes the frame and background color invisible

Objects

Note:

Make sure not to use semi-transparent pictures in projects targeted for operator panels. Since these targets do not fully support opacity, semi-transparent pictures may turn out unclear.

Tag/Security Group

Parameter

Select Tag

Select Security Groups

Select Visibility

Description

Connection to a tag from the tags configuration page

Allows limiting access of the object based on security groups. If left empty, the object can be accessed by anyone.

Configuration of visibility:

Default

: The visibility specified on the General tab of the

Security Manager is used.

Disabled

: The object is disabled for users with insufficient access rights

Hidden

: The object is invisible for users with insufficient access rights

Normal

: The object looks normal also for users with insufficient access rights

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

177

7.3.5

Animated Label Object

The Animated Label object is used to display an animated text label in iX

Runtime.

Settings for the Animated Label object are available from the General ribbon tab while the object is selected:

Note:

Using the animated label object creates a slightly higher load on the CPU.

Parameter

Text

Animated

Animation speed

Animation Direction

Description

The text to be displayed in the animated label

If enabled, the text starts to animate

Set the speed for the animation. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32767.

Set the animation direction:

From right to left

From left to right

From right to left to right

From left to right to left

From down to up

From up to down

From down to up to down

From up to down to up

Animated Label Dynamics

It is possible to set dynamics, i.e. tag dependent values for the Animated Label properties. These can be found in the Dynamics tab in the ribbon bar.

Related information

Dynamics Ribbon Tab

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

178

7.3.6

Audit Trail Viewer Object

The Audit Trail Viewer displays information about operator changes that have been logged with the audit trail function.

Related information

Audit Trail

Audit Trail Viewer

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

179

7.3.7

Button Object

The Button tool draws a button with a text and/or picture. The button can be configured to perform a specific task in runtime via the Actions ribbon tab or using script. The text on the button object can also be set to depend directly on a tag value using the General control on the Dynamics ribbon tab. If a picture is used, the picture file is added to the Project Pictures folder in the Component Library.

Settings for the button object are available from the General ribbon tab while the object is selected:

Picture Group

Parameter

Picture

Multi Picture

Transparent

Description

Selects a picture to display on the button. Pictures from the Project Pictures folder is available for selection directly. It is also possible to browse the PC environment for a picture.

Select

No Picture

to remove a previously selected picture.

Checking the Multi Picture checkbox will make it possible to display different pictures based on the value of a connected tag according to section

Configure Multi Pictures

.

Multi Picture or single picture displayed on button.

Makes the picture transparent

Objects

Note:

Make sure not to use semi-transparent pictures in projects targeted for operator panels. Since these targets do not fully support opacity, semi-transparent pictures may turn out unclear.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

180

Configure Multi Pictures

Different pictures can be displayed on the button based on the value of a connected tag, following the steps below:

1. Check the Multi Picture checkbox.

2. Click on the

Picture

control on the Picture group of the General tab.

3. Select a tag to control which picture to display.

4. Click

Add

to add pictures and configure start and end values for each picture.

You can browse the PC for pictures, or select pictures from the current project.

Objects

5. Click

OK

.

The picture on the button will now change according to the value of the selected tag. When the value is out of limits, no picture is displayed.

Picture Alignment Group

Parameter

Vertical Alignment/

Horizontal Alignment

Description

Set alignment for the picture

Clicking the small arrow in the lower right corner of the Picture Alignment group displays the picture properties with a number of additional picture settings.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

181

Style Group

Parameter

Style

Appearance

Description

Predefined graphical styles for the button

The appearance of the button, including possibility to make the button rounded and settings for each corner of the button.

Note:

When editing default button style properties, for example corner radius, appearance in runtime may sometimes differ from when designing the project in iX Developer.

Text Group

Parameter

Text

Multiline

Word Wrap

Configure Texts

Description

Text displayed on the button

Lets the text run over more than one line, using [

Enter

].

Confirm the text entry by pressing [

Ctrl

] + [

Enter

].

Wraps the text to fit the width of the button

Links the displayed text to a tag. The Text field value is shown if the selected tag is not within the set limits

Text Alignment Group

Parameter

Horizontal/Vertical

Description

Adjusts the text on the button horizontally or vertically

Visibility Group

Parameter

Transparent

Description

Makes the object transparent

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

182

Creating a Button with Momentary Function

In order to create a button with a momentary function, you need to combine a

Set

Tag

action for Mouse Down with a

Reset Tag

action for Mouse Up .

Objects

Actions Ribbon Tab

Script

Component Library

Related information

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

183

7.3.8

Circular Meter Object

The Circular Meter represents a numeric value, and displays the value of a connected tag.

Different styles can be used to change the graphical profile of the meter, and also if the meter is to be full, half or quarter.

Objects

Circular meters in Black Full style, Chrome Half style and Vintage Quarter style

Settings for the meter object are available from the General ribbon tab while the object is selected:

Angular Settings Group

Parameter

Start Angle/End Angle

Text Rotation

Clockwise

Description

The angular value is based on a start (0 degrees) at three o’clock

Select

Parallel

to let the numbers follow the outline of the meter, or

None

to display the numbers aligned horizontally.

Determines rotation orientation, clockwise or counter clockwise.

Region Settings Group

Parameter

Low Region/Medium

Region/High Region

Min/Max

Description

Define colors for up to 3 regions, and at which values to start and stop each region. Entering 0 for both minimum and maximum values displays no region color.

Value Scale Group

Parameter

Min Value/Max Value

Major Ticks

Minor Ticks

Description

Start/end value of scale.

These values can consist of one decimal digit.

Number of labeled scale marks on the meter

Number of scale ticks between two adjacent major ticks

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

184

Style Group

Style

Parameter

Appearance

Description

Predefined graphical styles for the meter. The smaller styles are intended in particular to allow full visibility in the smaller operator panels.

The appearance of the meter; full, half or quarter

Tag/Security Group

Parameter

Select Tag

Select Security Groups

Select Visibility

Description

Connection to a tag from the tags configuration page

Allows limiting access of the object based on security groups. If left empty, the object can be accessed by anyone.

Configuration of visibility:

Default

: The visibility specified on the General tab of the

Security Manager is used.

Disabled

: The object is disabled for users with insufficient access rights

Hidden

: The object is invisible for users with insufficient access rights

Normal

: The object looks normal also for users with insufficient access rights

Visibility Group

Parameter

Transparent

Scale

Description

Makes the object transparent

When unchecked, the scale color of the meter is made transparent. Scale color is set from Other Colors on the

Format tab.

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

185

7.3.9

Chart Object

The chart object is used to display values of connected array tags.

Settings for the chart object are available from the General ribbon tab while the object is selected:

Chart Settings Group

Parameter

Edit Series

Chart Types

Header

3D View

Description

Add, remove and edit the current series for this chart

Choose chart type. Available types are:

Area

Area Horizontal

Bar

Bar Join

Donut

Histogram

Kagi

Line

Line Fast

Line Horizontal

Line Point

Pie

Points

Radar

Set the name that is displayed above the chart

Set a 3D look and feel for the chart

X Axis Settings Group

Parameter

Visible

Grid Visible

Automatic

Minimum

Maximum

Description

Set the visibility of the X axis

Set the visibility of the X axis grid lines.

Automatically calculates the minimum and maximum

X axis values. Overrides the Minimum and Maximum properties

Set the minimum value of the X axis. If automatic is set, this value is ignored

Set the maximum value of the X axis. If automatic is set, this value is ignored

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

186

Y1 Axis Settings Group

Parameter

Visible

Grid Visible

Automatic

Minimum

Maximum

Description

Set the visibility of the Y1 axis

Set the visibility of the Y1 axis grid lines.

Automatically calculates the minimum and maximum

Y1 axis values. Overrides the Minimum and Maximum properties.

Set the minimum value of the Y1 axis. If automatic is set, this value is ignored.

Set the maximum value of the Y1 axis. If automatic is set, this value is ignored. When using charts with visible labels on curves the maximum value is extended to make room for label.

Y2 Axis Settings Group

Parameter

Visible

Grid Visible

Automatic

Minimum

Maximum

Description

Set the visibility of the Y2 axis

Set the visibility of the Y2 axis grid lines.

Automatically calculates the minimum and maximum

Y2 axis values. Overrides the Minimum and Maximum properties.

Set the minimum value of the Y2 axis. If automatic is set, this value is ignored.

Set the maximum value of the Y2 axis. If automatic is set, this value is ignored. When using charts with visible labels on curves the maximum value is extended to make room for label.

Style Group

Style

Parameter Description

Set the style of the chart

Visibility Group

Parameter

Scale

Transparent

Header

Legend

Description

Set the visibility of the scale

Make the chart transparent

Set the header visibility

Set the legend visibility

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

187

The Edit Series Dialog

Clicking the

Edit Series

control in the Chart Settings Group will open the Edit

Series Dialog. The Edit Series Dialog contains the following settings:

Name

Parameter

X Tag

Y Tag

Size

Labels

Color

Thickness

Axis Type

Description

The name of the Series, as shown in the legend in the chart.

The X Tag values.

The tag must be an array tag.

The number of elements shown will be the lowest common denominator of the X Tag array size and the Y Tag array size.

Optional: The Y Tag values for the chart.

The tag must be an array tag.

If this value is not chosen, the X Tag Values will still be visible and the Y Axis will be set automatically. The number of elements shown will be the lowest common denominator of the X Tag array size and the Y Tag array size.

Optional: The number of elements in the tag arrays. This property overrides the sizes of the X Tag array size and Y

Tag array size. If this value is not set, the lowest common denominator of the X Tags array size and the Y Tags array size will be chosen as size.

Set a label for each point in the chart. There is one label for each available tag value.

Choose the color of the series.

Set the thickness of the series. This applies for the chart types Line, Line Fast, Line Horizontal and Line Point.

Select the Y Axis that this series will use.

Objects

Note:

Chart objects with large arrays where values are frequently changing may affect performance.

Related information

Array Tags

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

188

7.3.10

Database Viewer Object

The Database Viewer can be used to display database contents in runtime.

For operator panel projects, only databases included in the current project are available. For PC targets, it is possible to access databases from anywhere in the network environment.

Settings for the database viewer object are available from the General ribbon tab while the object is selected:

Settings Group

Parameter

Show Controls

Database

Description

When the box is checked, the user is able to select database and database table in runtime

Path to database to be loaded automatically in runtime*

Table Name

Browse Data Table

The table in the selected database to be loaded automatically in runtime*

Opens a browse dialog for selection of database and database table in design time. The path and table name will be added to the

Database

and

Table Name

fields.

* If the entered database or table does not exist or is not valid, an empty database viewer is displayed in runtime.

Note:

Simulation of the object on the development PC is supported only for PC targets.

Related information

Database

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

189

7.3.11

Digital Clock Object

The digital clock displays date, time and/or day of week.

The time zone is selected on the System ribbon tab and is transferred to the target when the project is downloaded to it. If no time zone is selected, the time zone that has been selected for the panel or PC will be retained.

The date and time display format (for example using AM/PM for time) is based on the operating system settings. For operator panel projects, this format may be altered by selecting another region on the System ribbon tab.

Display Format Group

Parameter

DateAndTime/

Date/Time

Show Day of Week

Show Seconds

Description

Selection of date and time components

When checked, day of week is displayed

When checked, seconds are displayed

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

190

Objects

7.3.12

Linear Meter Object

The Linear Meter represents a numeric value, and displays the value of a connected tag.

Different styles can be used to change the graphical profile of the meter, and also if the meter is to be horizontal or vertical.

Linear meters in Classic Horizontal style and Eclipse Vertical style

Settings for the meter object are available from the General ribbon tab while the object is selected:

Value Scale Group

Parameter

Min Value/Max Value

Major Ticks

Minor Ticks

Description

Start/end value of scale

These values can consist of one decimal digit.

Number of labeled scale marks on the meter

Number of scale ticks between two adjacent major ticks

Style Group

Style

Parameter

Appearance

Description

Predefined graphical styles for the meter. The smaller styles are intended in particular to allow full visibility in the smaller operator panels.

The appearance of the meter; horizontal or vertical

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

191

Tag/Security Group

Parameter

Select Tag

Select Security Groups

Select Visibility

Description

Connection to a tag from the tags configuration page

Allows limiting access of the object based on security groups. If left empty, the object can be accessed by anyone.

Configuration of visibility:

Default

: The visibility specified on the General tab of the

Security Manager is used.

Disabled

: The object is disabled for users with insufficient access rights

Hidden

: The object is invisible for users with insufficient access rights

Normal

: The object looks normal also for users with insufficient access rights

Visibility Group

Parameter

Transparent

Scale

Description

Makes the object transparent; only indicator bar and scale will be visible

When unchecked, the scale color of the meter is made transparent. Scale color and indicator color are set from

Other Colors on the Format tab.

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

192

7.3.13

Multi Picture Object

The Multi Picture object allows using a set of pictures as an object. The pictures change in runtime depending on intervals of a tag value.

Pictures can be imported to the project by browsing the hard disk for graphic files.

Imported pictures are added to the Project Pictures folder in the Component

Library.

Settings for the Multi Picture object are available from the General ribbon tab while the object is selected:

Settings Group

Parameter

Configure Pictures

Reset Picture

Stretch

Lock Aspect Ratio

Description

Configuration of start/end values of intervals and selection of pictures for each interval. Pictures can be selected from the Project Pictures folder or from the hard disk. Transparency can also be set. Original picture size is displayed. The

Add/Delete

buttons are used to add and remove items to/from the object.

Restores original height and width to picture.

Adapts height and width to the selection frame when resizing the picture.

Maintains the height/width ratio of the object.

Objects

Note:

Make sure not to use semi-transparent pictures in projects targeted for operator panels. Since these targets do not fully support opacity, semi-transparent pictures may turn out unclear.

Related information

Component Library

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

193

7.3.14

Picture Object

The Picture object allows using a picture as an object. Pictures can be imported to the project by browsing the PC environment for graphic files. Imported pictures are added to the Project Pictures folder in the Component Library.

The displayed picture can also be dynamic; depending of a set of pictures that have been linked to intervals in a tag value.

Settings for the picture object are available from the General ribbon tab while the object is selected:

Settings Group

Parameter

Change Picture

Reset Picture

Stretch

Transparent

Description

Opens a browse dialog for selection of picture

Restores original height and width to picture

Adapts height and width to the selection frame when resizing the picture

Makes the object transparent, i.e. makes the frame and background color invisible

Objects

Note:

Make sure not to use semi-transparent pictures in projects targeted for operator panels. Since these targets do not fully support opacity, semi-transparent pictures may turn out unclear.

Related information

Component Library

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

194

7.3.15

Roller Panel Object

The Roller Panel object is used to display predefined texts for certain tag values.

Settings for the Roller Panel object are available from the General ribbon tab while the object is selected:

Settings Group

Parameter

Title

Title Visible

Loop Scroll

Disable Operator Input

Description

Set the title for the Roller Panel

Determines if the title is visible or not

Determines if the values will loop around or not

Determines if the Roller Panel is editable or not

Touch Settings Group

Parameter

Scroll Sensitivity

Scroll Friction

Description

Set the sensitivity of the scroll

Set the friction of the scroll

Text Group

Parameter

Configure Texts

Description

Opens the Configure Texts dialog

Configure Text Dialog

The Configure Texts dialog contains the following properties:

Text

Parameter

Start Value

End Value

Description

The text to be displayed for the item

The starting value for when this item should be selected

The ending value for when this item should be selected

Roller Panel Dynamics

It is also possible to set dynamics, i.e. tag dependent values for the Roller Panel properties. These can be found in the Dynamics tab in the ribbon bar.

Related information

Dynamics Ribbon Tab

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

195

7.3.16

Slider Object

The Slider can be used to adjust a numeric value. The slider sets a value to a connected tag. If the tag value changes for other reasons, the slider control handle will show the actual value in runtime.

Objects

Sliders in Chrome and Eclipse Horizontal styles, and Vintage Vertical style

Settings for the slider object are available from the General ribbon tab while the object is selected:

Value Scale Group

Parameter

Min Value/Max Value

Major Ticks

Minor Ticks

Description

Start/end value of scale

These values can consist of one decimal digit.

Number of labeled scale marks on the slider

Number of scale ticks between two adjacent major ticks

Style Group

Style

Parameter

Appearance

Description

Predefined graphical styles for the slider. The smaller styles are intended in particular to allow full visibility in the smaller operator panels.

The appearance of the slider; horizontal or vertical

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

196

Tag/Security Group

Parameter

Select Tag

Select Security Groups

Select Visibility

Description

Connection to a tag from the tags configuration page

Allows limiting access of the object based on security groups. If left empty, the object can be accessed by anyone.

Configuration of visibility:

Default

: The visibility specified on the General tab of the

Security Manager is used.

Disabled

: The object is disabled for users with insufficient access rights

Hidden

: The object is invisible for users with insufficient access rights

Normal

: The object looks normal also for users with insufficient access rights

Visibility Group

Parameter

Transparent

Scale

Description

Makes the object transparent

When unchecked, the scale color of the slider is made transparent. Scale color and indicator color (color of the handle) are set from Other Colors on the Format tab.

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

197

7.3.17

Text Object

The Text object is used to display read-only information for the operator. The displayed text can be static, or linked to intervals in a tag value that contain different strings. The text object can also be set to depend directly on a tag value using the General control on the Dynamics ribbon tab.

Settings for the text object are available from the General ribbon tab while the object is selected:

Text Group

Parameter

Text

Multiline

Word Wrap

Configure Texts

Auto Stretch Font

Auto Size

Description

Text that the object displays

Lets the text run over more than one line, using [

Enter

].

Confirm the text entry by pressing [

Ctrl

] + [

Enter

].

Wraps the text to fit the width of the object. Not available if Autosize is selected.

Links the displayed text to a tag. The Text field value is shown if the selected tag is not within the set limits.

Resizes the font to fit the height of the object. Not available if Autosize is selected.

Resizes the object according to the size of the default text string length and font size. Default setting for the text object.

Text Alignment Group

Parameter

Horizontal/Vertical

Description

Adjusts the text in the object horizontally or vertically.

Not available if Autosize is selected.

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

198

7.3.18

Touch Combo Box Object

The Touch Combo Box object is used to create text selections from a drop-down list.

Settings for the Touch Combo Box object are available from the General ribbon tab while the object is selected:

Settings Group

Parameter

Auto Size Item Height

Item Height

ArrowBox Width

ScrollBar Width

Description

The Touch Combo Box will ignore the Item Height value and size the values automatically

Set the height of the individual items in the Touch Combo

Box

Set the width of the Arrow Box

Set the width of the scroll bar

Text Group

Parameter

Configure Texts

Description

Opens the Configure Texts dialog

Configure Text Dialog

The Configure Texts dialog contains the following properties:

Parameter

Text

Start Value

End Value

Description

The text to be displayed for the item

The starting value for when this item should be selected

The ending value for when this item should be selected

Touch Settings Group

Parameter

Scroll Sensitivity

Description

Set the sensitivity of the scrolling

Touch Combo Box Dynamics

It is also possible to set dynamics, i.e. tag dependent values for the Touch Combo

Box properties. These can be found in the Dynamics tab in the ribbon bar.

Related information

Dynamics Ribbon Tab

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

199

7.3.19

Touch List Box Object

The Touch List Box object is used to handle a list of predefined texts.

Settings for the Touch List Box object are available from the General ribbon tab while the object is selected:

Settings Group

Parameter

Separator Visible

Item Height

ScrollBar Width

Description

Show or hide a separator between the items in the Touch

List Box

Set the height of the individual items in the Touch List Box

Set the width of the scroll bar

Touch Settings Group

Parameter

Scroll Sensitivity

Description

Set the sensitivity of the scrolling

Text Group

Parameter

Configure Texts

Description

Opens the Configure Texts dialog

Configure Texts Dialog

The Configure Texts dialog contains the following properties:

Parameter

Text

Start Value

End Value

Description

The text to be displayed for the item

The starting value for when this item should be selected

The ending value for when this item should be selected

Touch List Box dynamics

It is also possible to set dynamics, i.e. tag dependent values for the Touch List Box properties. These can be found in the Dynamics tab in the ribbon bar.

Related information

Dynamics Ribbon Tab

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

200

7.3.20

Trend Viewer Object

Trend viewers are used to display values of connected tags. Trend viewer curves represent tag values over time. A trend viewer object can show any number of trend viewer curves.

Note:

A large number of trend viewer pens and short sampling intervals may affect communication performance.

Trend Viewer

Curves Group

Communication Performance

Related information

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

201

7.4 Media Controls

The media controls are used to display media files, pdf files and web pages in runtime. The following media controls are described:

Media Player Object

PDF Viewer Object

Web Browser Object

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

202

7.4.1

Media Player Object

Media files can be added to the media player object, which allows selecting, starting and stopping the files in runtime. For operator panels, files in .mpeg1 and

.wmv format are supported. The added files are added to the Component Library.

Note:

Microsoft Media Player of version 10 or later is required.

Browse Folders Group

Parameter

Project Files

External Memory

Card

Description

Default option for browsing. The project files are listed in the Component Library. At least one of the folders has to be chosen.

Select this option for browsing if project files are placed on an external memory card. At least one of the folders has to be chosen.

Settings Group

Parameter

Media Source

Description

Select a media file to add to the media player, from the project files folder or by browsing the PC

Objects

Note:

The object is not supported on Panel TxA targets. Simulation of the object on the development PC is supported only for PC targets.

Note:

Connecting a tag to a Media Player Object will cause the media player to try to play a media clip with a name that corresponds to the tag’s value, ignoring the configured

Media Source parameter.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

203

Scripting to the Media Player Object

When scripting to the Media Player object, the name of the current media file has to be stated, for example:

MediaPlayer1.Source = “Bear.wmv”;

Prior to running the script, the media file has to be added manually to the Project

Files folder. When the script is executed, the file will be copied to the output directory.

Events for the media player can be used, for example:

MediaPlayer1.Play();

Related information

Component Library

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

204

7.4.2

PDF Viewer Object

Pdf files can be displayed in runtime using the PDF viewer object. The added files are available from the Component Library.

Note:

Adobe Reader of version 9 or 9.5 is required.

Browse Folders Group

Parameter

Project Files

External Memory Card

Description

Default option for browsing. The project files are listed in the Component Library. At least one of the folders has to be chosen.

Select this option for browsing if project files are placed on an external memory card. At least one of the folders has to be chosen.

Settings Group

Parameter

PDF File

Description

Select a PDF file to add to the PDF viewer, from the project files folder or by browsing the PC

Select which buttons to make available in runtime Buttons

In an operator panel, all PDF files in the project files folder will be available for selection in runtime, if the Open button is checked.

Note:

When using a PDF viewer object in a popup screen, only the default style for the popup screen is supported.

Objects

Note:

The object is not supported on Panel TxA targets. Simulation of the object on the development PC is supported only for PC targets.

Component Library

Popup Screen

Adobe Reader not Recognized

Related information

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

205

7.4.3

Web Browser Object

Web pages can be displayed using the web browser. It is possible to set up the web browser with regular web browsing functionality, with selection of web addresses in a list or input via the on screen keyboard. It is also possible to allow showing certain defined web pages only, or a local htm/html file.

Note:

Microsoft Internet Explorer of version 9 or later is required.

Settings Group

Settings for the Web Browser object are available from the General ribbon tab while the Web Browser object is selected:

Parameter

Address

Home

Favorites

Address Read Only

Address Field

Go Button

Home Button

Back Button/Forward

Buttons

Description

The default web page of the web browser object.

The web page that will be displayed when the Home button is pressed.

Addition of web pages that will be available for selection from the drop-down address field in runtime.

Checking the box disables entering text in the address field

Unchecking the box removes the address field in runtime

Unchecking the box removes the Go button in runtime

Unchecking the box removes the Home button in runtime

Unchecking the box removes the navigation buttons in runtime

Referring to a local htm/html file can be useful for example when the operator panel is not connected to Internet. The local file has to be located in the Project

Files folder of the current project, and is addressed in the following format:

“File://filename.htm/html” where “filename.htm/html” represents the actual file”, e.g.

File://ReadMe.htm

.

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

206

Web Browser Limitations

The web browser object functionality is limited under some circumstances:

Function

Web browser object

Popup windows

Web browser in a popup screen

Simulation of the web browser

Support of some web pages

Limitation description

Opening popup windows from the web browser in runtime

Other styles than the default style for the popup screen

Simulation on the development PC

Access of some web pages from within the web browser.

PC targets

Supported

Not supported

Operator Panel targets

Not supported on Panel

TxA targets.

Not supported

Not supported

Supported

Supported

Not supported

Not supported

May not be supported.

If the web browser does not behave as expected, it is recommended to use the standard Internet

Explorer, available in the Operator panel, instead. The standard

Internet Explorer can be started using the

Run

action and executing the iesample.exe file.

Related information

Popup Screen

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

207

7.5 Special Controls

The special controls are used to create attractive navigation facilities in runtime.

Navigation List Box Object

Screen Carousel Object

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

208

7.5.1

Navigation List Box Object

Screen navigation using the Navigation List Box object is performed via thumbnails, and scripting can be used for advanced functionality.

Note:

The object is supported only for Panel TxC and PC targets.

General Group

Parameter

Orientation

Scroll Tolerance

Description

Select horizontal or vertical orientation for runtime scrolling.

Defines tolerance of pressing the touch screen (or scrolling with the cursor) slightly outside of a navigation list box item in runtime before the navigation is actually carried out.

Item Settings Group

Parameter

Configure Items

Height/Width

Margin

Border Width

Corner Radius

Show Text

Description

Definition of items included in the navigation list box object; see below.

Size of the items in the navigation list box.

Margin between navigation list box items.

Width of navigation list box item borders.

Corner radius of navigation list box items.

Selection of whether to show text below navigation list box items.

The individual items in the navigation list box object are handled by clicking

Configure Items

. Use the

Add

and

Delete

buttons to add and remove items to/from the navigation list box.

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

209

Objects

Parameter

Picture

Screen

Script Info

Text

Description

Selection of picture by browsing the PC environment or among the project files.

Selection of screen to navigate to.

Optional text to serve as a reminder if scripts are used.

Text displayed under each navigation list box item. Only visible if Show Text is checked under Item Settings.

Use the up and down arrows to facilitate reorganizing of navigation list box items.

Related information

Script

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

210

7.5.2

Screen Carousel Object

Screen navigation using the Screen Carousel object is performed via thumbnails in a 3D view. The screen carousel can be configured to rotate automatically, or actions can be configured to control screen carousel behavior.

Note:

The object is supported only for Panel TxC and PC targets.

General Group

Parameter

Number of Visible

Items

Scroll Duration (ms)

Use Reflection

Auto Scroll

Description

Maximum number of visible items.

Time used for an item to move to the next position in the carousel.

Adds a reflecting layout to the object.

Makes the object rotate automatically.

Item Settings Group

Parameter

Configure Items

Height/Width

Margin

Border Width

Corner Radius

Show Text

Description

Definition of items included in the screen carousel object; see below.

Size of the items in the screen carousel.

Margin between screen carousel items.

Width of screen carousel item borders.

Corner radius of screen carousel items.

Selection of whether to show text below screen carousel items.

The individual items in the screen carousel object are handled by clicking

Configure Items

. Use the

Add

and

Delete

buttons to add and remove items to/from the screen carousel.

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

211

Objects

Parameter

Picture

Screen

Script Info

Text

Description

Selection of picture by browsing the PC environment or among the project files.

Selection of screen to navigate to.

Optional text to serve as a reminder if scripts are used.

Text displayed under each screen carousel item. Only visible if Show Text is checked under Item Settings.

Use the up and down arrows to facilitate reorganizing of screen carousel items.

Related information

Actions Ribbon Tab

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

212

7.6 Debug Tools

Debug tools are used for trouble shooting and monitoring.

Alarm Distributor Viewer Object

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

213

7.6.1

Alarm Distributor Viewer Object

The Alarm Distributor Viewer is a debug tool, used to display information from the Alarm Distributor function.

Related information

Alarm Management

Alarm Distributor Viewer

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

214

7.7 Windows Controls

The following Windows controls are described:

Check Box Object

Progress Bar Object

Combo Box Object

Group Box Object

List Box Object

Radio Button Object

Text Box Object

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

215

7.7.1

Check Box Object

The Check Box object controls a digital tag value. The connected tag gets the value 1 when the box is checked and the value 0 when the box is unchecked.

The appearance of the text can be adjusted in the Font group of the Home ribbon tab.

Note:

Changing font family is only supported for projects designed for panel TxC and PC targets.

Objects

Settings for the check box are available from the General ribbon tab while the object is selected:

Text Group

Parameter

Text

Multiline

Word Wrap

Auto Stretch Font

Auto Size

Description

Text that the object displays

Lets the text run over more than one line, using [

Enter

].

Confirm the text entry by pressing [

Ctrl

] + [

Enter

].

Wraps the text to fit the width of the object. Not available if Autosize is selected.

Resizes the font to fit the height of the object. Not available if Autosize is selected.

Resizes the object according to the size of the default text string length and font size.

Text Alignment Group

Parameter

Horizontal/Vertical

Description

Adjusts the text in the text box horizontally or vertically.

Not available if Autosize is selected.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

216

7.7.2

Combo Box Object

A Combo Box can be used to create selections from a drop-down list. When a keyboard is connected to the operator panel it is also possible to make selections from the list by typing.

Settings for the combo box are available from the General ribbon tab while the object is selected:

Text Group

Click

Configure Texts

to enter texts for different values.

Objects

Select a tag, and then click

Add

until there are enough rows in the table. Enter texts and start values.

It is also possible to use script code to control the contents of a combo box.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

217

Example

The following script code relies on the existence of a combo box (ComboBox1) and a set of predefined recipes (“Book” and “TV”).

Objects

When the screen opens, the script clears the box and writes the recipe name strings in the box. Selection from the combo box triggers loading of a recipe.

Related information

Script

Recipe Management

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

218

7.7.3

Group Box Object

The Group Box is used to draw a labeled frame around a group of objects.

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

219

7.7.4

List Box Object

The List Box handles a list of predefined texts.

Text Group

Click

Configure Texts

to enter texts for different values.

Objects

Select a tag, and then click

Add

until there are enough rows in the table. Enter texts and start values.

It is also possible to use script code to control the contents of a list box.

Example

The following script code includes two objects on Screen1, a button (Button1) and a list box (ListBox1).

When the button is clicked, the script is triggered and a string is written to the list box and the value of an internal counter (count) is incremented.

Related information

Script

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

220

7.7.5

Progress Bar Object

The Progress Bar displays a meter without numeric scaling, representing an analog value. The value can be connected to a tag.

The other properties, such as orientation, minimum and maximum values, and meter color (foreground property) are set in the Property grid.

Related information

Property Grid

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

221

7.7.6

Radio Button Object

A Radio Button controls the value of a connected digital tag.

The appearance of the text can be adjusted in the Font group of the Home ribbon tab.

Settings for the radio button are available from the General ribbon tab while the object is selected:

Text Group

Parameter

Text

Multiline

Word Wrap

Auto Stretch Font

Auto Size

Description

Text that the object displays

Lets the text run over more than one line, using [

Enter

].

Confirm the text entry by pressing [

Ctrl

] + [

Enter

].

Wraps the text to fit the width of the object. Not available if Autosize is selected.

Resizes the font to fit the height of the object. Not available if Autosize is selected.

Resizes the object according to the size of the default text string length and font size.

Text Alignment Group

Parameter

Horizontal/Vertical

Description

Adjusts the radio button text horizontally or vertically.

Not available if Autosize is selected.

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

222

It is possible to use script code to make a group of radio buttons enable combined control of a tag value. Exactly one of the radio buttons is active (set to 1) at any time. The following example includes 3 radio buttons and a tag of int16 type.

Objects

Radio buttons are grouped based on which screen they belong to.

Related information

Script

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

223

7.7.7

Text Box Object

The Text Box is used to include a box with multiple rows of text.

By default, the text can be modified when clicking on the box in runtime. The entered text is not saved in runtime; when the screen changes the value will be reset. The text box can also be configured as read-only.

Settings for the text box object are available from the General ribbon tab while the object is selected:

Text Group

Parameter

Text

Multiline

Word Wrap

Read Only

Description

Text that the object displays

Lets the text run over more than one line, using [

Enter

].

Confirm the text entry by pressing [

Ctrl

] + [

Enter

].

Wraps the text to fit the width of the object

Disables input in runtime

Text Alignment Group

Parameter

Horizontal/Vertical

Description

Adjusts the radio button text horizontally or vertically

Visibility Group

Parameter

Transparent

Description

Makes the object transparent, i.e. everything but the text will be invisible

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

224

7.8 Additional Controls

iX Developer allows using and creating third party controls in order to enhance application functionality and additional customization. This section describes different technologies and includes configuration examples. Sample projects are available at the Beijer Electronics web site.

To understand and use all the information in this document, .Net development skills are required.

Related information

Referenced Assemblies

Error Related to Third Party Controls

7.8.1

Target Platform

Different technologies are used for third party controls depending on the target platform for the iX Developer application. The target can be either PC or

Windows CE.

Windows CE has no support for vector graphic (WPF) and only uses .Net

Compact Framework which is a subset or the .Net Framework used on a PC.

Windows CE does not natively support GDI+, so GDI+ related functionality was removed from .Net Compact Framework.

PC Target

•

•

Two different technologies can be used for a PC target:

Standard Windows forms and GDI+

WPF (Windows Presentation Foundation)

WPF uses vector graphics, and the appearance of the control is described in

XAML. Since iX Developer is a WPF application, it is recommended to use

WPF when developing customized controls or user controls for a PC target.

Controls developed in WPF can bind to a tag value in iX Developer, in opposite to

Windows forms controls, that cannot be bound to tag values.

Windows CE Target

Windows CE only uses the .Net Compact Framework (a subset or the .Net

Framework used on a PC), and does not support vector graphics (WPF).

Windows CE does not natively support GDI+, so GDI+ related functionality was removed from the .Net Compact Framework.

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

225

Objects

Limitations

•

•

•

•

•

Some of the limitations regarding third party controls are listed below:

Control Designers (a designer class that can extend design time support) are currently not supported.

TypeConverters in a separate design dll are not supported.

Complex property editing in the property grid is not supported. All complex properties have to be set up in script.

.Net Compact Framework controls can include design dll and so called

AssmetaData dll to handle attributes that are not supported in Windows

CE. Currently this is not supported by iX Developer. Because of this, it is important to always test the code on the target platform.

The Script Editor allows scripting against properties and methods that are not supported in Windows CE. Because of this, it is important to always test the code on the target platform.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

226

7.8.2

Adding Controls to the iX Developer

Toolbox

Third party controls can be added to the Objects toolbox in iX Developer, following the steps below:

1. Select the

Objects

group on the

Home

ribbon tab, and fully expand the

Objects toolbox by clicking the lower right arrow.

Objects

2. Click

Add Control

.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

227

3. Select controls to add among the default controls, or click

Browse

to add customized controls.

Objects

4. Click

OK

.

The added controls are now available under

Additional Controls

in the Objects toolbox.

7.8.3

Default controls include controls added by the user and the .Net 4 controls installed with the .Net Framework.

Installed controls include all controls that are installed in the GAC (Global

Assembly Cache) on your computer.

Note:

Third party controls that are used in a project are not copied to the project folder. This means that it is not possible to open a project with third party controls on another PC without installing the controls. But the application will work in runtime on another target, since references are copied to the output folder when building the project.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

228

Objects

7.9 WPF Controls

WPF (Windows Presentation Foundation) uses vector graphics, and the appearance of the control is described in XAML. Since iX Developer is a WPF application, it is recommended to use WPF when developing customized controls or user controls for a PC target. Controls developed in WPF can bind to a tag value in iX Developer.

User controls and custom controls are supported in WPF.

7.9.1

WPF User Controls

•

•

•

A WPF user control can be described as a composition of different user interface controls. Creating a WPF user control is similar to creating a window:

You have a XAML file and C# class file for a user control.

The class file extends the user control class, adding additional behavior and properties.

The XAML file encapsulates the composing controls; styles, templates, animations and whatever necessary for “Look & Feel”.

Since the WPF user control is a just composition, it is really easy to create. It does not require a lot of WPF UI model knowledge.

7.9.2

WPF Custom Controls

•

•

WPF custom controls are more flexible, but are more complicated than a user control, and require a profound understanding of the WPF user interface model.

A number of certain user interface controls, such as button, progress bar or speedometer has to be extended.

The appearance of the custom control has to be defined in XAML, as the custom control itself has no look.

Most of the controls in iX Developer are custom controls, which makes it possible to restyle them to various different layouts without changing the code files; just the

XAML.

A rounded meter in different styles

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

229

7.9.3

Creating a WPF User Control with

Tag Connection

The following example describes how to create a WPF user control that can be connected to a tag.

The complete code is included at the end of the example.

1. Start Visual Studio to create a new project, and select

WPF User Control

Library

.

Objects

2. Add [DefaultProperty("Value")] to the class, to define which property the tag should set when then value is set.

3. Add a dependency property with same name as the attribute above: static readonly DependencyProperty ValueProperty;

4. Add a static constructor and register to the dependency property.

5. Create a Value property of type object.

6. Add a TextBox to the user control.

7. Add a binding to the TextProperty and bind to the Value Property.

8. Remember to change ElementName to the name of your control.

9. Compile and test by adding the control to the iX Developer toolbox.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

230

Note:

When an update is made, the existing control must be updated under

C:\Users\Public\Documents\Beijer Electronics AB\iX Developer\Thirdparty\

.

Example Code

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

231

7.9.4

Creating a Windows Forms User

Control for a PC Target

The following example describes how to create a Windows Forms user control designated for a PC target.

1. Start Visual Studio to create a new project, and select

Windows Forms

Control Library

.

Objects

2. Add a TextBox and a Button to the design surface.

3. Add Event Handler for Button click.

4. Add Event Handler for TextBox lost focus.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

232

5. Add a Value Property and INotifyPropertyChanged implementation:

Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

233

6. Use the following code to connect the control to a tag value in iX Developer:

Objects

The code shows how the value is set on the user control when the tag changes its value, and how the tag value is changed when the user control changes its value.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

234

7.9.5

Creating a Windows Forms User

Control for a CE Target

The following example describes how to create a Windows Forms user control designated for a CE target (an operator panel).

1. Start Visual Studio 2005 or 2008 to create a new Smart Device Project.

Objects

2. Select

Windows CE

for Target platform.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

235

3. Select

Control Library

.

Objects

4. Use the same code as in the

Creating a Windows Forms User Control for a PC

Target

example.

Note:

Always test your code on the target platform, as properties/methods currently not supported may be included in the code. See

Limitations

for details.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

236

Ribbon Tabs

8 Ribbon Tabs

Each of the ribbon tabs holds a set of one or more groups. Each group holds a set of one or more controls that are used to manage screens and functions in a project.

The behavior of the ribbon tabs can be configured to be context dependent using the

Options

button in the File menu.

Double-click on any of the ribbon tab headings to collapse the ribbon area. A double-click on a ribbon tab, when the ribbon is collapsed, brings back the original style. This can also be changed from the context menu of the Quick Access toolbar. Tooltips are displayed for all controls on the ribbon tabs. The tooltip offers a brief description of the selected control.

iX Developer contains the following ribbon tabs:

Home Ribbon Tab

Project Ribbon Tab

System Ribbon Tab

Insert Ribbon Tab

View Ribbon Tab

Dynamics Ribbon Tab

General Ribbon Tab

Actions Ribbon Tab

Related information

Options

Quick Access Toolbar

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

237

8.1 Home Ribbon Tab

The Home ribbon tab contains groups of controls for editing screens in the project:

Clipboard Group

Screen Group

Objects Group

Font Group

Format Group

Tag/Security Group

Name Group

Ribbon Tabs

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

238

Ribbon Tabs

8.1.1

Clipboard Group

The Clipboard group contains the paste, cut, copy and format painter controls.

Cut

Cuts the selection to the clipboard. Also available from the keyboard with [

Ctrl

]

+

x

or from the context menu.

Copy

Copies the selection to the clipboard. Also available from the keyboard with

Ctrl

]

+

c

or from the context menu.

Paste

Copies the clipboard to the current screen. Also available from the keyboard with

[

Ctrl

] +

v

or from the context menu.

Note:

Text from a compatible source, e.g. clipboard text, will be converted to a Text Box object when pasted into a screen.

Format Painter

The Format Painter control is used to copy formatting from one object to another.

This is useful when creating a uniform appearance for objects.

To apply formatting to another object:

1. Click on an object with the desired format and font properties. Click on the

Format Painter

control. The mouse pointer changes to a paintbrush.

2. Click on the object to format.

The format properties from the first object is applied to the selected object.

Format and font properties can be copied between objects of different types, for example from a rectangle to an HMI control.

Note:

Modification to an object using the

Other Colors

control is not applied when using the

Format Painter.

Related information

Other Colors

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

239

Ribbon Tabs

8.1.2

Screen Group

The Screen control group contains the add screen, background screen, delete screen and current language commands. Screens can also be added and deleted from other controls, such as the Navigation Manager and the context menu of the

Project Explorer.

Add Screen

The

Add Screen

command creates a new empty screen that opens for editing.

Clicking the lower part of the Add Screen button shows a selection of screen templates that are available for selection.

Delete Screen

The

Delete Screen

command removes the current screen from the project, and also disconnects any associations from other screens to the removed screen.

Note:

A deleted screen cannot be restored with the

Undo

command.

Background Screen

Any screen can be used as background to the current screen.

All objects in a background screen will work as designed in the project application.

Objects in a background screen must be edited in the screen that they reside in. Objects in a background screen will be dimmed in the current screen in the development environment.

Current Language

Current language is the language that is being used at the particular moment that the project is designed. If multiple languages are not used in the project, only

Default

is available.

Related information

Screens

Language Management

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

240

Ribbon Tabs

8.1.3

Objects Group

The Objects control group contains static and dynamic objects that can be added to a screen.

Related information

Objects

8.1.4

Font Group

All fonts available in the development PC is available for selection when designing the project. All fonts used in the project will be included when downloading the project to the target.

Note:

The number of fonts needs to be considered when calculating the total size of a project.

Note:

The default font Tahoma does not support Chinese characters in operator panel projects in runtime. The font has to be changed to a font that supports Chinese characters, e.g. MS Song. Keep in mind that some fonts require a lot of project memory.

The

Font

group is used to change text style. The text style is defined for the currently selected object.

Font and Font Size

Select font from the drop-down list. Use the increase/decrease font size buttons or set a specific font size.

Note:

Objects, for which

Auto Stretch Font

is selected, will not be affected by these settings. The font size will be autosized when resizing the object height.

Style and Color

An italic, underlined or bold style can be selected for the text. The style stays regular if all the boxes are left unchecked. Use the Font Color drop-down list to set the color of the text.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

241

Ribbon Tabs

8.1.5

Format Group

The Format group controls the color and position of a selected object. Predefined quick styles offer selection of uniform appearance for different objects. Selection of multiple objects makes it possible to easily affect more than one object at the same time.

Clicking the small arrow in the lower right corner of the Format group displays the shadow, fill and outline properties with a number of additional format settings.

Note:

It is possible to use the Format Painter (in the Clipboard group) to copy color and font properties from one object and paste it to another object.

Related information

Selecting Multiple Objects

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

242

Ribbon Tabs

Default Appearance

It is possible to select a style to be used as the default style next time the same kind of object is added.

Right-click on an object to display the context menu, and select

Save Default

, to use the current appearance of the object as the default style. To make existing objects adopt the default style, select

Load Default

. To return to normal mode, select

Clear Default

.

Format Painter

Related information

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

243

Ribbon Tabs

Arrange

The Arrange control can be used to order, group, resize, align and distribute screen objects.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

244

Ribbon Tabs

Order Objects

The commands in the Order Objects group are used to send objects to the front or back of each other.

Command

Bring to Front

Send to Back

Bring Forward

Send Backward

Description

Positions the selected object on top of any overlapping objects

Positions the selected object behind any overlapping objects

Makes the selected object swap place with the nearest overlapping object

Makes the selected object swap place with the nearest obscured object

Note:

The Object Browser offers an easy way of arranging objects to the front or back of each other.

Related information

Object Browser

Group Objects

The

Group Objects

commands are used to manage selections of multiple objects.

A grouped object is moved and treated as one object with respect to formatting and resizing, and can also be stored in the Component Library for reuse.

Any selection of objects on the screen can be grouped.

When multiple objects are selected, one object is the primary selection. This is shown with an orange frame, while other objects in the group have blue frames.

Click on any object in the group to change this to the primary selection.

A grouped object can be resolved into individual objects using the

Ungroup

command. A property that was given to the group will be kept by each of the object, provided that the property is applicable.

Make Same Size

The

Make Same Size

commands are used to adjust the size of a group of selected objects. The size will be determined by the

primary selection

(the guide object).

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

245

Ribbon Tabs

Position Objects

The

Position Objects

commands can be used to align and distribute multiple objects neatly. Objects can be aligned vertically and horizontally using the primary selection for the group as guide object. Objects can be aligned with respect to their center (center/ middle) or their edges (top/bottom/right/left).

Component Library

Snap Objects to Other Objects

Grid

Related information

Quick Styles

The

Quick Styles

control contains a number of preset visual object color schemes that can be applied to screen objects.

The predefined graphical styles make it possible to achieve a uniform appearance on items like meters and trend viewers. An object that has a style applied can be further customized, for example with font settings.

It is also possible to customize the predefined styles to styles of your own preference. The quick styles are not specific to the current project. They will be available for all iX Developer projects.

Note:

Controls in the Style group on the General tab can be used to reshape objects such as meter, slider and trend viewer to predefined styles. These styles are not the same as the quick styles.

Related information

Font Group

Other Colors

Color settings for special properties of an object, for example scale color for a meter or out-of-range validation of an analog numeric object, are available from the

Other Colors

control.

Shape Fill

The

Shape Fill

control is used to alter the fill color and gradient of the selected shape. A preview of the colors in the Shape Fill selection window is displayed directly on the object on the screen as the pointer hovers over the different colors.

Shape Outline

The

Shape Outline

control is used to alter the outline color and outline width of the selected shape.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

246

Shape Effects

Shape Effects

makes it possible to add bevel style and shadow effects.

Note:

Bevel in combination with fill color “no fill” is only supported for Panel TxC and PC targets. The bevel will not be visible in runtime on other operator panels targets.

Ribbon Tabs

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

247

Ribbon Tabs

8.1.6

Tag/Security Group

Connection to controller tags as well as object access (based on security groups) and visibility are configured from the

Tag/Security

group.

Tag/Security

group without and with selections

Parameter

Select Tag

Select Security Groups

Select Visibility

Description

Connection to a tag from the tags configuration page. Tags may also be added directly, but will be remain internal until connected to a controller tag. Click expressions.

...

to configure

Allows limiting access of the object based on security groups. If left empty, the object can be accessed by anyone.

Configuration of visibility:

Default

: The visibility specified on the General tab of the

Security Manager is used

Disabled

: The object is disabled for users with insufficient access rights

Hidden

: The object is invisible for users with insufficient access rights

Normal

: The object looks normal also for users with insufficient access rights

Note:

When access rights are not fulfilled, showing an access denied message or opening a login dialog can be configured using the security function.

Related information

Expressions

Adding Tags during Editing

Security Management

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

248

Ribbon Tabs

8.1.7

Name Group

All objects and screens are automatically named when they are created. The name is displayed and can be edited in the Name group. Screen names can also be edited in the Project Explorer.

The name of an object is a symbolic identifier and is an alphanumeric string, beginning with a letter. Name strings can contain letters (a-z, A-Z), numbers

(0-9), and underscore (‘_’) characters.

Note:

Renaming objects and screens included in scripts will cause the scripts not to function.

Related information

Project Explorer

Invalid Names

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

249

Ribbon Tabs

8.2 Project Ribbon Tab

The Project ribbon tab contains a number of project related functions, divided into the following groups:

Run Group

Transfer Group

Project Group

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

250

Ribbon Tabs

8.2.1

Run Group

The Run group enables validation, rebuilding, simulation and debugging of the project.

Build

The build control validates the script code and compiles the current project.

Recompiling the project using the Build control will result in only the changes being made to project to be recompiled. To fully recompile the project, instead use the Rebuild control.

Rebuild

The rebuild control validates the script code and recompiles the complete project.

Run

A test of the project can be executed directly on the PC. Clicking

Run

will perform a validation and start a simulation, if the project can be built. If errors are found during validation, an error message will be displayed.

During simulation, the project will communicate directly with the configured controllers, provided that the controllers are correctly connected to the development environment.

Note:

If project build fails, check that the absolute path to the project, including its components, does not exceed 260 characters.

Simulate

It is also possible to test and run the application on the development PC without connection to the selected controller, by clicking

Simulate

. If the project is valid, the simulation is started.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

251

Ribbon Tabs

Debug

The Debug command will allow the user to debug scripts in a real c# debugger with the possibility to set breakpoints etc. The command builds and checks the current project, and launches the application associated with the generated file.

The function scans the development PC for an installed debugger. If no debugger is found, a link for downloading debugger is presented. User preferences for the script debugger may be entered under

Options

, available from the File menu.

Note:

Visual Studio 2008 requires SP1 in order for associated files to be opened automatically

(i.e. using the Debug command).

Debugging of a project with Script module included is not supported using Visual Studio

2010.

Debugging of a CE project is not supported using Visual Studio 2010.

Related information

Output

Database

Options

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

252

8.2.2

Transfer Group

The Transfer group enables download to operator panel, upload database and export to folder functions.

Ribbon Tabs

Note:

Time zone, region or daylight saving settings will not be transferred if these settings have been changed manually in the panel.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

253

Ribbon Tabs

Download

The Download control sends the project to an operator panel or a PC with an iX

Runtime installation, in the network environment.

Parameter

Connected targets

Download

Verify

Log

Description

Choose a target type to transfer the project to.

Start the project transfer.

Click the “

Download all source code ( for later upload)

” checkbox to compress the project and save it as a ZIP file on target.

Click the “

Password protected

” checkbox and enter a password to protect the ZIP file.

Download is supported for Panel TxA, TxB, TxC and TA targets.

The verify function enables the user to check if a target platform configuration is identical to the project configuration.

Verify is supported for Panel TxA, TxB, TxC targets. If greyed out, please update to latest “System program”.

Show the data being logged during the download and verify process.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

254

Ribbon Tabs

If the target for the download contains newer files or files that don’t exist in the project, a dialog will appear prompting for which files to be kept, overwritten or deleted.

Note:

If the same project is to be downloaded to a panel again, the original datalogger in the panel will be replaced if any settings have been changed in the datalogger since the last download.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

255

Ribbon Tabs

Downloading a Project to an Operator Panel or a PC with an iX

Runtime installation

1. Connect the operator panel to the PC via an Ethernet connection.

2. Click

Download

.

3. The download dialog opens and all panels connected in the network are listed with information about IP address and panel type. Select the panel to download to in the list.

4. Check that the IP address is correct and click

Download

.

a. Optional: Click the “

Include compressed project

” checkbox to compress the project and save it as a ZIP file.

b. Optional: Click the “

Password protected

” checkbox and enter a password to protect the ZIP file.

The panel will respond to a download request by stopping any current project.

The panel will display that it is ready for project download. When the download is completed, the new project will automatically start running.

The project folder is located at the following path. Only for PC targets!

%public%\Documents\Beijer Electronics AB\iX Developer

Runtime\Project

Note:

The panel settings can be controlled from the panel’s Service menu.

Related information

Service Menu

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

256

Ribbon Tabs

Upload Database

The Upload Database command will collect the database from an operator panel in the network environment to a file on the development PC. The panel will pause during the upload, and will be started automatically afterwards.

Note:

The database may only be collected from a panel running the same project (i.e. a project with the same name and of the same size) as the current iX Developer project.

Collecting a Database from an Operator Panel

1. Connect the operator panel via an Ethernet connection.

2. Click

Upload Database

.

3. The Upload Database dialog opens and all panels connected in the network are listed with information about IP address and panel type. Select the panel to collect from in the list.

4. Check that the IP address is correct and click

Backup

.

5. Select location of the saved database.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

257

Ribbon Tabs

Export

Exports the project to a folder. The export dialog allows creating a new folder.

Exporting a Project to an Operator panel or a PC with an iX

Runtime Installation

A project can be exported to an Operator panel or a PC with an iX Runtime installation via the

Export

command. The project can be exported to an USB stick or, on the condition that a network connection is configured, directly to a folder in the runtime PC.

The project in the runtime PC is started by running the .exe file located in the project folder.

There will also be created a

TransferClient

.exe file, a binaries folder and a configuration file. The

TransferClient

is a standalone application for downloading the exported project to a target. It works in the same way as the

Download

control from inside iX Developer. It is possible to view a log for the export by clicking the

Log

button on the

TransferClient

dialog.

Related information

Download

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

258

Ribbon Tabs

8.2.3

Project Group

The project target as well as name and title are available for editing in the Project

Group. The project title is displayed in the title bar in runtime by default. Leaving the title empty displays the screen name/screen title only in runtime.

The Project Group also contains the Compress Project command, a Project

Settings control and the possibility to refer to other assemblies using the

Referenced Assemblies control.

Compress Project

Settings

Referenced Assemblies

Related information

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

259

Ribbon Tabs

Compress Project

The project source files can be compressed into a Zip file using the

Compress

Project

command. The Zip file can be saved to an USB stick or, on the condition that a network connection is configured, directly to a folder in the runtime PC

Parameter

Path to Zip file

Password protected

Description

Browse to the location to save the Zip file.

Optional password protection of the Zip file.

Related information

Opening a Project

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

260

Ribbon Tabs

Settings

Properties such as application behavior in runtime, system font and settings for mouse and keyboard can be edited by clicking

Settings

in the Project group.

Alarm Button

Deployment

Display Panel

Mouse/Touch Input Delay

System Font

Virtual Keyboard

Screen Name and Screen Title

Related information

Alarm Button

Parameter

Show Screen

Description

Selection of screen to be displayed when the predefined

Alarm key on a keyboard operated panel is pressed.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

261

Deployment

Ribbon Tabs

Parameter

Overwrite Files on

Target

Pre Transfer

Post Transfer

Description

This setting can be used to determine the default behavior when transferring projects and the transfer finds critical files already present on the target.

Add commands to be executed before the file transfer.

Only available for standard PC targets.

Add commands to be executed after the file transfer. Only available for standard PC targets.

Related information

Pre Transfer

Post Transfer

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

262

Ribbon Tabs

Pre Transfer

The following commands can be executed before the file transfer:

Command

Reboot

Wait

Run

Description

Reboots the target. Possible arguments:

True

and

False

.

Using

True

, the target tries to start any project present.

The argument

False

, or no argument, prevents the target from starting the project automatically.

Pauses the execution of the commands. This can be useful if the user runs commands that takes time for the target to recover from. Possible arguments: a number, indicating how many whole seconds to wait.

Starts any given process. The first argument must always be the path to the executable to be run. Keep it inside quotes if it contains spaces.

Other arguments:

/p:

or

-p:

are parameters for the process to start. The parameters must be inside quotes and separated by spaces.

/noshell

or

-noshell

means that the process should be run outside of the command shell.

/wd:

or

-wd:

means working directory for the process to run. If left empty will default to active projects directory.

The parameters must be inside quotes.

/wait:

or

-wait:

means that the

TargetControlService

should wait until the process has exited before continuing.

If the process does not exit by itself, this argument should be left out.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

263

Ribbon Tabs

It is possible to use the following

macros

in conjunction with the

Run

commands:

Macro

$projectpath$

$startproject$

$finished$

Description

Replaced by target project folder. If the user has downloaded an executable together with the project and wants to run it, this macro represents the destination folder.

Example:

"$projectpath$\dbbackup.exe"

/p:"backup.bak" -noshell -wait

This will run the

dbbackup.exe

with the startup argument

backup.bak

, it will run outside the

command shell

due to

-noshell

, and the transfer will not continue until the process has exited due to

-wait

.

Registers and starts the project. The transfer will continue.

Tells the system that the transfer is finished and closes connections. The project will not start. Should only be used in Post Transfer.

Note:

Only available for Panel TxC and PC targets.

Post Transfer

The same commands and macros as for the Pre Transfer can be used, but are executed after the file transfer.

Note:

Only available for PC targets.

Related information

Pre Transfer

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

264

Display Panel

Ribbon Tabs

Parameter

No Title Bar

Title Bar

Close Button

Topmost

Maximize On Startup

Screen Size

Panel Rotate

Panel Type

Memory Card

Description

Displays the project without title bar in runtime.

Displays the project with its title and a set of minimize, maximize and close buttons in the title bar.

Displays the project with its title and a close button in the title bar.

Makes the project the topmost application in runtime.

Only available for Panel TxC and PC targets.

Makes the project maximized in runtime. Only available for PC targets.

Screen resolution. Only available for standard PC targets.

Displays selected rotation. It is possible to change the rotation of the panel and panel content by 0, 90, 180 or

270 degrees. Only available for Panel T7A, T10A and TxC targets.

Displays selected target. It is possible to select another target.

State the size of the internal memory card, to save project data on it.

Only available for Panel TA70 - TA150 targets.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

265

Changing Project Target

Memory Card

Related information

Ribbon Tabs

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

266

Ribbon Tabs

Changing Project Target

When changing to another target, you can select to automatically resize objects to the new target size. Different scale factors are used horizontally and vertically, to optimize conversion to and from wide screen targets. In this case, the aspect ratio of objects will change.

The following items are resized with the same factor when having selected automatic resizing:

Item

Graphical objects

Popup screens

Font

A minimum scaled font of 10 pixels ensures readability in the smaller operator panels

Dynamics size and move

Not all objects and styles are supported for all project targets. When changing to another project target, objects and styles that are not supported in the new target will be deleted and will not possible to restore. Removed objects are logged, and displayed in a window after the transformation. The log may be saved to file. Build files are always cleaned and project saved after transformation.

Note:

Changing back to the previous target will not restore removed objects.

Memory Card

The available project memory is displayed in the lower right corner of the application window, when the target is an operator panel. The project memory size is updated when the project is validated.

If the size of the memory card is not stated, project data will be saved in the internal operator panel memory.

For panels with a pre-installed internal memory card, the size of the memory card is added automatically.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

267

Ribbon Tabs

Mouse/Touch Input Delay

It is possible to configure a delay of mouse and touch screen input in runtime. This setting is global and will affect all objects for which

Delay Mouse/Touch Input

has been selected. The Property grid is used to enable delay of mouse and touch screen input for individual objects.

Property Grid

Related information

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

268

System Font

Ribbon Tabs

Parameter

Font

Font Size

Description

Select a system font that will be used as the default font.

Use the increase/decrease font size buttons or set a specific default font size.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

269

Virtual Keyboard

Ribbon Tabs

Parameter

Enable Virtual

Keyboard

Keyboard Layout

Description

Select whether a virtual keyboard is to be displayed when alphanumerical input is needed.

The layout of the virtual keyboard.

The virtual keyboard that is displayed in runtime depends on settings made for the Multiple Languages function. If only the default language is used, the project settings (above) are used.

Related information

Language Management

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

270

Ribbon Tabs

Referenced Assemblies

The Referenced Assemblies command makes it possible to refer to your own or third-party .Net assemblies (.dll). Their methods and properties will be made available when scripting and will be included by the name completion function, in the same way as for built-in components.

1. Click on

Referenced Assemblies

.

2. Click

Add

.

3. Browse to the desired dll file in your PC environment and click

Open

.

The methods and properties of the added dll file are now available for scripting.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

271

Ribbon Tabs

8.3 System Ribbon Tab

The System ribbon tab controls system settings. These settings are divided into the following groups:

Time Zone and Region Group

Buzzer Group

Backlight Group

Serial Ports Group

Servers Group

Output Devices Group

Service Menu Group

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

272

8.3.1

Time Zone and Region Group

National settings are made in the Time Zone and Region group.

Ribbon Tabs

Select time zone, whether to adjust for daylight saving, and region. If no time zone is selected, the time zone that has been selected for the panel or PC will be retained.

The date and time display format (for example using AM/PM for time) is based on the operating system settings. For operator panel projects, this format may be altered by selecting another region.

8.3.2

Buzzer Group

Select whether to let a key beep sound when making keyboard input in runtime.

Only available when an operator panel is selected as target.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

273

Ribbon Tabs

8.3.3

Backlight Group

Select to automatically turn off the backlight after a certain number of seconds, and whether to keep the backlight on if a notifier window (e.g. alarm indicator or communication error message) is visible.

Backlight settings are supported only for operator panel targets. For other targets, the Microsoft Windows screen saver may be used.

8.3.4

Serial Ports Group

For each of the COM ports, select if it is to be configured as an RS232, RS422 or

RS485 port. Only available when an operator panel is selected as target.

Note:

The number of available ports and possible configuration differ depending on selected target.

For Panel TxA, TxB, TxC and IPC, four COM ports can be configured:

Port

COM1

COM2

COM3

COM4

Description

RS232 incl. CTS

RS422 or RS485

RS232 excl. CTS

RS422 incl. RTS or RS485

Port 1

Label on back of panel

Port 2

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

274

Ribbon Tabs

8.3.5

Servers Group

The Servers group contains the FTP, Web Server, OPC UA Server and Remote

Access commands. The FTP and Remote Access commands are only available when an operator panel is selected as target.

FTP

When enabled, it is possible to upload/download files to/from the operator panel provided that there is an FTP client program in the PC, e.g. Internet Explorer,

Windows Commander or some other standard FTP program.

It is possible to set up access to the FTP server with login requirements and/or as anonymous. An anonymous user has read-only access rights. A user that logs in with the correct user name and password gets read/write access rights.

Only available when an operator panel is selected as target.

FTP is not supported for Panel TxC.

Remote Access

The Remote Access function makes it possible to access, reflect and control an operator panel from a PC by using the free VNC client program Remote Access

Viewer together with the built-in VNC server in the operator panel.

It is possible to set up Remote Access with a view only password and/or a full access password. The view only password allows reflecting the panel remotely; the full access password allows also control of maneuverable objects in the panel.

Only one VNC client can connect to the VNC server.

Only available when an operator panel is selected as target.

Note:

To protect secrecy when entering a password via Remote Access Viewer, it is recommended to use the PC keyboard. Otherwise it is possible that the cursor on the remote operator panel displays which keys are pressed on the alphanumeric keyboard.

For more information about Remote Access, refer to the documentation for

Remote Access and Remote Access Viewer.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

275

Web Server

Enables the possibility to host project files for a web client.

Ribbon Tabs

Parameter

Enable Web Server

Port

Enable forms authentication

Description

Click this checkbox to enable the web server.

Enter a server port number.

Click this checkbox to enable forms authentication and enter user name and password.

The password can be any alphanumeric string. The passwords minimum length is four characters and the maximum length is 20 characters.

Related information

Web Server

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

276

OPC UA Server

Enables the possibility to publish tags with an OPC UA Server.

Ribbon Tabs

Parameter

Enable OPC UA Server

Port

Allow anonymous login

Description

Click this checkbox to enable the OPC UA server.

Enter a server port number.

Click this checkbox to enable anonymous login. For a secured login enter user name and password and leave the checkbox unchecked.

Address space

All tags, except array tags, defined in project will be shown.

The tags will be put in a folder named Tags in Namespace TagProvider on the server.

The NodeClass of all tags will be Variable.

All tag values will be published scaled with the offset and gain of the tag.

Tag Properties Mapping

Parameter

Tag property

Name

Data Type

Access Right

Description

Poll Group Interval

Description

UA Server Attribute

DisplayName /

BrowseName

DataType

AccessLevel /

UserAccessLevel

Description

MinimumSamplingInterval

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

277

Ribbon Tabs

Certificate

A certificate will be auto generated and self-signed when the server first starts up.

The certificate will be valid for 20 years.

The certificate contains no IP address since this could change after the certificate has been generated.

Limitations

Limitation

Discovery

Encoding / Transport

User authentication

Security

Description

Not supported

Only UA TCP Binary

Only user name / password

Only one account

No encryption support

Related information

OPC UA Client

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

278

Ribbon Tabs

8.3.6

Output Devices Group

Printer devices can be set up by clicking the Settings control in the Output Devices group.

Printer Device

USB Printer Connection

Parameter

Printer Connector

Printer Type

Description

Select USB

Select printer type. Selection possibilities: PCLINKJET and PCLLASERJET.

Printer supports PCL 5c Click this checkbox if the printer supports the PCL 5c color printer protocol.

This option is only available if the printer type is set to

PCLLASERJET.

Network settings

Serial settings

Page Orientation

Not available

Not available

Portrait or landscape orientation of the printout

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

279

Ethernet Printer Connection

Ribbon Tabs

Parameter

Printer Connector

Printer Type

Description

Select Ethernet

Select printer type. Selection possibilities: PCLINKJET and PCLLASERJET.

Printer supports PCL 5c Click this checkbox if the printer supports the PCL 5c color printer protocol.

This option is only available if the printer type is set to

PCLLASERJET.

Network settings Enter Printer name / path

Enter user name

Enter password

Serial settings

Page Orientation

Not available

Portrait or landscape orientation of the printout

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

280

Serial Printer Connection

Ribbon Tabs

Parameter

Printer Connector

Printer Type

Select Serial

Not available

Printer supports PCL 5c Not available

Network settings Not available

Serial Settings

Description

Port Name:

connected to

Select which COM-port the printer is

Baud Rate:

Select the baud rate for transmission of data.

Data Bits:

character.

Select the number of data bits in each

Parity:

Set the parity bit. The parity bit in each character can be set to none , odd, even, mark or space.

Stop Bits:

Select the number of stop bits to be sent at the end of every character. Selection possibilities: None, One,

Two or TwoPointFive.

Hand Shake:

Select which handshaking protocol to be used. Selection possibilities: XON/XOFF, CTS/RTS.

New Line Character:

Select end of line character.

Selection possibilities: None, CR/LF, CR or LF.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

281

Parameter

Serial Settings

Page Orientation

Ribbon Tabs

Description

Page Length (lines):

Select the number of lines to be printed out before form feed. Form feed will not take place if the page length is set to 0.

Page Width (characters):

Set the page width specified as the maximum characters in a single line of text.

Code page:

The code page consists of a table of values that describes the character set for a particular language. The default code page in iX Developer is 850.

Not available

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

282

Ribbon Tabs

Printouts via Operator Panel

When printing to a serial printer from an operator panel, the printer must support

IBM character set (850).

When printing to a USB printer from an operator panel, the printer must support the printer classes according to the table below:

Printer type

Color laser printer

Monochrome laser printer

Color ink-jet printer

Printer class requirement

USB + PCL 5c

USB + PCL 5e

USB + PCL 3e

Recommended printer model

HP LaserJet 2700

HP LaserJet 1320

HP Deskjet 5652

When printing via Ethernet from an operator panel, the network printer must be a shared resource in the Windows network.

Note:

Connecting a printer via Ethernet requires that a PC is connected between the operator panel and the printer.

Note:

Printing to a color laser printer via Ethernet is not supported for operator panels.

Note:

The printer class PCL 6 is not supported at all for connection to operator panels.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

283

Ribbon Tabs

8.3.7

Service Menu Group

The Service Menu group provides a possibility to protect the service menu with a pin code.

Parameter

Pincode

Description

Enter a pincode for the service menu. No pincode enables the service menu for all users. Only numbers (0–9) are allowed.

Related information

Service Menu

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

284

Ribbon Tabs

8.4 Insert Ribbon Tab

The Functions group, available from the Insert ribbon tab, contains functions and screen that can be added to the project.

Functions Group

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

285

Ribbon Tabs

8.4.1

Functions Group

All added components are available from Project Explorer folders. The Project

Explorer already includes alarm server, multiple languages, security functions and tags. All functions are managed through their configuration pages.

Parameter

Text Library

Data Logger

Alarm Distributor

Script

Recipe Management

Function Keys

Scheduler

Audit Trail

Reports

Screens

Description

With the text library function, text tables can be created, where values are linked to texts.

Data can be logged and saved to a database on time intervals or depending on changed values.

Alarms can be distributed between operator panels, with notification via printer, SMS or e-mail using the alarm distributor.

A script module can be included to program features not covered by included functions and actions, or to be used to share functionality among functions.

Several recipes can be inserted in the project. Each recipe function handles a pre-defined set of recipe items.

Function keys for operator panels as well as for the regular

PC keyboard can be configured.

A scheduler can be used to control events in the process at special times.

The Audit Trail function enables tracking of operator actions.

The reports function allows adding Excel report templates to the project.

The Screen control adds new screens to the current project.

Related information

Project Explorer

Configuration Pages

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

286

Ribbon Tabs

8.5 View Ribbon Tab

The Windows group, available from the View ribbon tab, contains controls to toggle visibility of the tool windows:

Windows Group

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

287

Ribbon Tabs

8.5.1

Windows Group

The tool controls in the Windows group are highlighted when active.

Tool window

Project

Explorer

Output

Cross

Reference

Error List

Navigation

Overview

Description

Shows all screens and components included in the application

Displays detailed information concerning the project validation and build

Provides an overview of where a specific tag is used

Displays information about problems and errors detected during build

Provides an overview of all screens included in the project, with zooming facilities.

Manages screens and screen navigation

Default Position

Docked to the left part of the application window

Docks to the lower part of the application window

Docks to the right part of the application window

Docks to the lower part of the application window

Floating window

Desktop area

Navigation

Manager

Property

Grid

Object

Browser

Component

Library

Shows detailed properties of a selected screen or object

Docks to the right part of the application window as a tab

Floating window Displays an overview of all objects in the current screen and enables setting visibility and locking objects easily, as well as placing objects in front or back of each other.

Contains predefined as well as user-defined graphical components

Docks to the right part of the application window as a tab

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

288

Ribbon Tabs

8.6 Dynamics Ribbon Tab

The Dynamics ribbon tab includes the following groups:

Layout Group

Color Group

General Group

The controls on the Dynamics tab are used to change the properties of an object depending on a changed tag value.

A lock icon resembling a chain indicates that a specific dynamic setting is made for the selected object.

If, for example, dynamic fill settings are made, it is not possible to make fill settings for the object from the Format group on the Home tab.

Note:

Security has higher priority than dynamics.

Visibility has higher priority than blink.

Note:

Scripting to a property for which Dynamics has been configured disables the dynamic settings.

To release an object from a dynamic control, click the control with the lock icon and click

Clear Dynamics

in the appearing dialog.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

289

Ribbon Tabs

8.6.1

Layout Group

Move

The Move control in the Position group changes an object’s position, based on a tag value.

Position coordinates on the screen are given in pixels of the screen resolution. The position 0,0 corresponds to the upper left corner of the screen.

To move an object vertically when a tag value changes:

1. Draw and position the object at the start position. Keep the object selected.

2. Click on

Move

on the Dynamics tab to open the Move Dynamics Editor.

3. Select the tag to control the movement.

4. Enter a start and end value for the tag.

Start and end positions are suggested based on the current start position. A

“ghost object” will appear at the suggested finish position. A guide line that connects the center of the original object with the ghost object appears.

5. Move the ghost object in the screen to its final position.

The coordinates for the object is updated. An animation of the move appears on the screen. Coordinate values can also be updated directly in the numerical fields (End Top, End Left). The coordinates for start and finish will limit the movement of the object irrespective if the tag value is outside its start and end value.

6. Click

OK

to save and close the Move Dynamics Editor.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

290

Ribbon Tabs

Note:

When Position or Size dynamics is applied, moving or resizing of the object will be disabled. A lock icon resembling a chain in the upper left corner of the object (when selected) indicates that the object has a dynamic control applied and that it cannot be moved or resized.

Size

The Size control in the Size group changes an object’s size, based on a tag value.

Dynamic resizing of external picture files may result in a resolution loss if the picture is enlarged to a size larger than what is used elsewhere in the current project.

Width and height of an object are given in pixels of the screen resolution.

To resize the width of an object when a tag value changes:

1. Draw and size the object at its start size. Keep the object selected.

2. Click on

Size

on the Dynamics tab to open the Resize Dynamics Editor.

3. Select the tag to control the resizing.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

291

Ribbon Tabs

4. Fill in the values that for start and finish. Size is given in screen resolution pixels.

Start size is suggested based on the current start size. A finish size is suggested as a fixed increase of the start size horizontally and vertically. A “ghost object” will appear with the finish size.

Note:

The object can only be resized from left to right and top to bottom.

5. Resize the ghost object in the screen to its final size.

The coordinates for the object is updated. An animation of the resizing appears on the screen. Coordinate values can also be updated directly in the numerical fields (End Width, End Height). The coordinates for start and finish will limit the size of the object irrespective if the tag value is outside its start and end value.

6. Click

OK

to save and close the Resize Dynamics Editor.

Note:

When Position or Size dynamics is applied, moving or resizing of the object will be disabled. A lock icon resembling a chain in the upper left corner of the object (when selected) indicates that the object has a dynamic control applied and that it cannot be moved or resized.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

292

Ribbon Tabs

8.6.2

Color Group

The Fill and Outline controls in the Color group change an object’s fill color or outline (border) color, based on a tag value.

To alter the fill color of an object when a tag value changes:

1. Draw the object. Keep the object selected.

2. Click on

Fill

on the Dynamics tab to open the Color Dynamics Editor.

3. Select the tag that is to control the color.

4. Fill in values to trigger color change.

5. Select color and gradient from the color menu.

6. Click

OK

to save and close the Color Dynamics Editor.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

293

Ribbon Tabs

8.6.3

General Group

Visibility

The Visible control in the Visibility group determines if an object is to be displayed in the screen or not, based on a tag value.

To hide an object when a tag value changes:

1. Draw the object. Keep the object selected.

2. Click on

Visible

on the Dynamics tab.

3. Select the tag that is to control visibility. The object will be visible on the screen at a certain tag value.

Note:

The selected value will be treated as True (visible). All other values will be treated as False (invisible).

Security has higher priority than dynamics.

Visibility has higher priority than blink.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

294

Ribbon Tabs

Blink

It is possible to select a tag to enable blinking depending on the tag’s current value.

Note:

The selected value will be treated as True (blink enabled). All other values will be treated as False (blink disabled).

Security has higher priority than dynamics.

Visibility has higher priority than blink.

The blink interval can be set dynamically or constantly.

Blinking Objects

Related information

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

295

Ribbon Tabs

General

The general control offers a possibility to alter the properties of objects in iX

Runtime.

Converter Operators

Converter operators are used to alter the properties of the objects. The converter operators can be selected from the

Edit general dynamics

dialog.

Parameter

Bool Converter

Color Converter

Linear Converter

Raw Converter

Text Library Group converter

Description

Converts 0 to false and all other values to true.

Converts value intervals to specified colors.

Converts values according to the linear equation.

Converts the value to a new value matching the target type.

Converts a value to a text.

Edit General Dynamics

The

Edit general dynamics

dialog contains different properties depending on which object is selected. The dialog is accessed by clicking the

General

control on the

General

group.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

296

Ribbon Tabs

Parameter

AcknowledgeAllButtonIsVisible

AcknowledgeSelectedButtonIsVisible

Address

AlternateBackground

AlternateForeground

AnimationSpeed

AutoSize

ButtonColor

ButtonHeight

ButtonWidth

ClearButtonIsVisible

Clockwise

ColumnHeaderBackgroundColor

EndAngle

FileName

FilterButtonIsVisible

Description

The bool converter is used to make the

AcknowledgeAll button on the alarm viewer object either visible or not.

The bool converter is used to make the

AcknowledgeSelected button on the alarm viewer object either visible or not.

The raw converter or a text library group converter can be used to change the default URL in the web browser object.

The color interval converter can be used to alter the background color.

The color interval converter can be used to alter the foreground color.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the animation speed of the animated label object.

The bool converter can be used to resize the object according to the size of the default text string length and font size.

The color interval converter can be used to alter the color of a buttons in the alarm viewer object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the height of the buttons in the alarm viewer object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the width of the buttons in the alarm viewer object.

The bool converter is used to make the

Clear button on the alarm viewer object either visible or not.

The bool converter is used to alter the rotation orientation in the circular meter object.

The color interval converter can be used to alter the column header background color.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the end angle in the circular meter object.

The raw converter or a text library group converter can be used to select a PDF file to add to the PDF viewer.

The bool converter is used to make the filter button on the alarm viewer object either visible or not.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

297

FontColor

Parameter

FontSize

GroupBackground

GroupForeground

Header

HighRegionColor

HighRegionMaximum

HighRegionMinimum

IndicatorColor

InfoButtonIsVisible

IsActive

IsAnimated

IsEnabled

IsHeaderVisible

IsLegendVisible

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

Ribbon Tabs

Description

The color interval converter can be used to alter the font color in for instance the text object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the font size in for instance the text object.

The color interval converter can be used to alter the group background color in the action menu object.

The color interval converter can be used to alter the group foreground color in the action menu object.

The raw converter or a text library group converter can be used to change the header in the chart object.

The color interval converter can be used to alter the high region color in the circular meter object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the maximum value of the high region indicator in the circular meter object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the minimum value of the high region indicator in the circular meter object.

The color interval converter can be used to alter the indicator color in for instance the circular meter object.

The bool converter is used to make the info button on the alarm viewer object either visible or not.

The bool converter can be used to activate or stop the data input to the chart object.

The bool converter can be used to enable or disable the animation of the animation label object.

The bool converter can be used to enable or disable an object.

The bool converter can be used to make the header on the chart object visible or not.

The bool converter can be used to make the legend on the chart object visible or not.

298

IsReadOnly

Parameter

IsXAxisAutomatic

IsXAxisGridVisible

IsXAxisVisible

IsY1AxisAutomatic

IsY1AxisGridVisible

IsY1AxisVisible

IsY2AxisAutomatic

IsY2AxisGridVisible

IsY2AxisVisible

LockAspectRatio

LowRegionColor

LowRegionMaximum

Ribbon Tabs

Description

The bool converter can be used to make for instance an analog numeric object editable or not.

The bool converter can be used with the chart object to toggle whether iX

Runtime automatically should calculate the minimum and maximum X Axis values or not.

The bool converter can be used with the chart object to toggle the visibility of the grid.

The bool converter can be used with the chart object to toggle the visibility of the

X Axis.

The bool converter can be used with the chart object to toggle whether iX

Runtime automatically should calculate the minimum and maximum Y1 Axis values or not.

The bool converter can be used with the chart object to toggle the visibility of the grid.

The bool converter can be used with the chart object to toggle the visibility of the

Y1 Axis.

The bool converter can be used with the chart object to toggle whether iX

Runtime automatically should calculate the minimum and maximum Y2 Axis values or not.

The bool converter can be used with the chart object to toggle the visibility of the grid.

The bool converter can be used with the chart object to toggle the visibility of the

Y2 Axis.

The bool converter can be used with the multi picture object to toggle the height/width ratio of the object.

The color interval converter can be used to alter the low region color in the circular meter object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the maximum value of the low region indicator in the circular meter object.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

299

Parameter

LowRegionMinimum

MajorTickCount

Maximum

MaxValue

MediumRegionColor

MediumRegionMaximum

MediumRegionMinimum

Minimum

MinorTickCount

MinValue

Opacity

Outline Thickness

PauseButtonIsVisible

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

Ribbon Tabs

Description

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the minimum value of the low region indicator in the circular meter object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to set the number of labeled time marks in for instance the linear meter object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the end value of the scale in for instance the linear meter object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the maximum value that can be entered in the analog numeric object.

The color interval converter can be used to alter the medium region color in the circular meter object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the maximum value of the medium region indicator in the circular meter object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the minimum value of the medium region indicator in the circular meter object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the start value of the scale in for instance the linear meter object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to set the number of scale ticks between two adjacent major ticks.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the minimum value that can be entered in the analog numeric object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the opacity of for instance the PDF viewer object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the outline thickness of for instance the rectangle object.

The bool converter is used to make the pause button on the alarm viewer object either visible or not.

300

PictureHeight

Parameter

PictureName

PictureStretch

PictureWidth

Prefix

RadiusX

RadiusY

ScaleColor

ScaleVisible

SelectedBackground

SelectedForground

SelectedGroupBackground

SelectedGroupForeground

SeparatorColor

Ribbon Tabs

Description

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the picture height in the button object.

The raw converter or a text library group converter can be used to change the picture shown in the picture object.

The bool converter is used to stretch a picture used in the button object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the picture width in the button object.

The raw converter or a text library group converter can be used to set a prefix to the digits entered in the analog numeric object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the radius of the x axis in the rectangle object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the radius of the y axis in the rectangle object.

The color interval converter can be used to alter the scale color in the circular meter object.

The bool converter is used to show or hide the scale in the circular meter object.

The color interval converter can be used to alter the background color of the selected action in the action menu object.

The color interval converter can be used to alter the foreground color of the selected action in the action menu object.

The color interval converter can be used to alter the background color of the selected menu group in the action menu object.

The color interval converter can be used to alter the foreground color of the selected menu group in the action menu object.

The color interval converter can be used to alter the separator color displayed between the buttons in the touch list object.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

301

Source

StartAngle

Parameter

Stretch

Suffix

Text

Title

TitleBackground

TitleForeground

Transparent

Value

ValueScaleMajorTickCount

ValueScaleMaximum

ValueScaleMinimum

ValueScaleMinorTickCount

Ribbon Tabs

Description

The raw converter or a text library group converter can be used to set the source file for the media player object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the start angle in the circular meter object.

The bool converter can be used to adjust the height and width to the selection frame in for instance the picture object.

The raw converter or a text library group converter can be used to set a suffix to the digits entered in the analog numeric object.

The raw converter or a text library group converter can be used to alter the text shown in for instance the text object.

The raw converter or a text library group converter can be used to alter the title of the roller panel object.

The color interval converter can be used to alter the title background color in the roller panel object.

The color interval converter can be used to alter the title foreground color in the roller panel object.

The bool converter can be used to toggle the transparency of for instance the button object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the value in the progress bar object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the number of labeled scale marks on the scale of the trend viewer object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the end value of the scale in the trend viewer object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the start value of the scale in the trend viewer object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the number of scale ticks between two adjacent major ticks on the scale of trend viewer object.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

302

Ribbon Tabs

X1

X2

X3

X4

Parameter

XAxisGridColor

XAxisMaximum

Y1AxisGridColor

Y1AxisMaximum

Y1AxisMinimum

Y2AxisGridColor

Y2AxisMaximum

Y2AxisMinimum

Description

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the X1 pixel coordinates of the line object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the X2 pixel coordinates of the line object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the X3 pixel coordinates of the line object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the X4 pixel coordinates of the line object.

The color interval converter can be used to alter the grid color of the X axis in the chart object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the maximum value of the X axis in the chart object.

The color interval converter can be used to alter the grid color of the Y1 axis in the chart object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the maximum value of the Y1 axis in the chart object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the minimum value of the Y1 axis in the chart object.

The color interval converter can be used to alter the grid color of the Y2 axis in the chart object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the maximum value of the Y2 axis in the chart object.

The linear converter or the raw converter can be used to alter the minimum value of the Y2 axis in the chart object.

Related information

Text Library

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

303

Ribbon Tabs

8.7 General Ribbon Tab

The General ribbon tab contains different property groups and controls for different objects. Appearance can be modified for graphical shapes and objects.

Scale settings can be made for meters and trend viewers. Additional settings can be made for some objects.

The Tag/Security group is available also on the Home ribbon tab.

The general properties are described separately for each object.

Related information

HMI Controls

in the

Objects

group

Media Controls

in the

Objects

group

Special Controls

in the

Objects

group

Windows Controls

in the

Objects

group

Tag/Security Group

on the

Home Ribbon Tab

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

304

Ribbon Tabs

8.8 Actions Ribbon Tab

Actions can be triggered in various ways, for example by clicking a button. The

Actions tab controls are used to define actions for objects. Alternatively, a script can be used to trigger an action.

An action is something that is performed, for example closing a screen. An action trigger is the act that generates an action, for example clicking a button.

The Actions ribbon tab contains different control groups for different objects.

A Click action configured for a button

Note:

It is not recommended to use multiple trigger methods, as this may lead to undesired behavior. It is recommended either to use a script or to program actions with the controls in the Actions tab. For example, avoid using

Click Action Trigger

in combination with

Mouse Button Action Triggers

.

Related information

Script

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

305

Ribbon Tabs

8.8.1

Click Action Trigger

Most objects can be assigned click actions, that will be executed when the object is clicked in runtime.

8.8.2

Mouse Button Action Triggers

The Mouse Down and Mouse Up action triggers can be used to create two-step actions when clicking with the left mouse button on an object.

Parameter

Mouse Down

Mouse Up

Mouse Enter

Mouse Leave

8.8.3

Description

A Mouse Down action will be performed when the left mouse button is pressed down on the object in runtime.

A Mouse Up action will be performed when the left mouse button is released from the object in runtime.

A Mouse Enter action will be performed when the cursor enters the boundaries of an object in runtime.

A Mouse Leave action will be performed when the cursor leaves the boundaries of an object in runtime.

Function Key Action Triggers

The Key Down and Key Up action triggers can be used to create two-step actions for function keys.

Parameter

Key Down

Key Up

8.8.4

Value Changed

Value Changed Action Triggers

Parameter

Input Value Changed

Description

The Input Value Changed action will be performed when a value is entered by the operator.

The Value Changed action will be performed when the value of the object has changed.

8.8.5

Focus Action Triggers

Parameter

Got Focus

Lost Focus

Description

A Key Down action will be performed when a function key is pressed in runtime.

A Key Up action will be performed when a function key is released in runtime.

Description

The Got Focus action will be performed when the object is selected.

The Lost Focus action will be performed when the object is no longer selected.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

306

Ribbon Tabs

8.8.6

Parameter

Navigated

Navigating

Navigation Action Triggers

Description

The Navigated action will be performed when having navigated to the address entered in the address field of the

Web browser object.

The Navigating action will be performed when having entered, but not reached, an address in the address field of the Web browser object.

8.8.7

Data Logger Action Triggers

The LogItemValueChanged and LogValuesUpdated are available for the Data

Logger.

8.8.8

Alarm Server Action Triggers

Alarm server actions can be configured for the entire alarm server, for alarm groups or for individual alarm items. The actions will be activated upon alarm status changes.

Alarm Server Events and Actions

Related information

Actions and Events for Alarm Items and Alarm Groups

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

307

Ribbon Tabs

8.8.9

Action Groups

Actions are divided into action groups.

Action group

Screen

Action

Close Screen

Print Screen

Description

Closes the current screen

Prints the current screen on printer or to a

.PNG file.

Selecting Print to file enables the following options:

Project files folder

: The file will be saved in a folder named “Project Files” in the projects execution path.

USB

: The file will be saved to a connected USB stick. (Operator panels only).

Memory card

: The file will be saved to the external memory card. (Operator panels only).

Browse

: A save dialog will be shown in runtime. (PC only).

Path

: The file will be saved to a specified path. (PC only).

Shows next screen Show Next

Screen

Show Previous

Screen

Show Screen

Returns to previous screen

Address Book

Alarm Distributor

Server

Audit Trail

Show Start

Screen

Open Address

Book

Open Print

Settings

Open Routes

Configuration

Export Audit

Trail Database

Shows the specified screen. If the screen is a popup the position of the screen can be defined by entering (X,Y) coordinates.

Shows the screen set to Startup screen

Opens the address book for editing. This action is used for

Alarm Distributor

purposes.

Modifies alarm distributor print settings

Modifies routes for the distributed alarm server

Exports the audit trail database to an USB stick (Operator Panel) or to a folder (PC).

When this is done the audit trail log is cleared.

The export will be saved in a .SDF file.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

308

Ribbon Tabs

Action group

Chart

Controller

Database

Datalogger

Output Devices

Backup

Database

Database

Export

Clear

Datalogger

Log Once

Start Logging

Stop Logging

Email

Configuration

Printer

Configuration

SMS

Configuration

Action

Pan Down

Pan Left

Pan Right

Pan Up

Reset View

Zoom In

Zoom Out

Change Active

Controllers

Clear Non-

Volatile Values

Decrement

Analog

Increment

Analog

Reset Tag

Set Analog

Set String

Set Tag

Toggle Tag

Description

Pans down in selected chart

Pans left in selected chart

Pans right in selected chart

Pans up in selected chart

Resets any panning and zoom in selected chart

Zooms into selected chart

Zooms out of selected chart

Defines which controllers are to be active after having restarted the project

Clears all stored values for tags marked as non-volatile

Decrements tag value

This action can be used with

Aliases

.

Increments tag value

This action can be used with

Aliases

.

Resets tag to 0

This action can be used with

Aliases

.

Sets tag to the specified value

This action can be used with

Aliases

.

Sets tag to the specified string

This action can be used with

Aliases

.

Sets tag to 1

This action can be used with

Aliases

.

Toggles tag between 0 and 1

This action can be used with

Aliases

.

Performs a backup of the project database

Exports selected database in csv format

Clears the specified datalogger

Makes the specified datalogger log once

Enables the specified datalogger

Disables the specified datalogger

Shows the e-mail configuration page. This action is used for

Alarm Distributor

purposes.

Shows the printer configuration page.

Shows the SMS configuration page. This action is used for

Alarm Distributor

purposes.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

309

Ribbon Tabs

Action group

Recipe

Reporting

Security

Trend Viewer

Action

Delete Recipe

End Offline

Recipe Editing

Export Recipe

Import Recipe

Load Recipe

Save Recipe

Start Offline

Recipe Editing

Generate

Report

Export User

Accounts

Import User

Accounts

Login

Logout

Show Users

Dialog

Show Trend

Viewer Legend

Trend Viewer

History

Description

Deletes recipe

Sets the tags in the specified recipe in online mode.

Exports a recipe to a .CSV file

Imports a recipe from a .CSV file

Loads recipe

Saves recipe

Sets the tags in the specified recipe in offline mode.

Generates a report file that can be output to a printer or saved as an Excel file.

Selecting “File” enables the following options:

Project files folder

: The file will be saved in a subfolder named ”Reports” in the “Project

Files” folder.

USB

: The file will be saved to a connected USB stick. (Operator panels only).

Memory card

: The file will be saved to the external memory card. (Operator panels only).

Browse

: A save dialog will be shown in runtime. (PC only).

Path

: The file will be saved to a specified path. (PC only).

Exports user data to a location that the operator states

Imports user data from a location that the user states

Displays a login dialog

Logs out the current user

Displays a dialog where users can be added, edited or removed

Displays the legend tool with a possibility to show and hide curves, and to display values of a specific trend viewer sample.

The Trend Viewer History action includes the following choices:

On

: Shows trend history from when the action was triggered (including offset settings made using trend viewer dynamics).

Off

: Returns to showing real time trend viewer data.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

310

Ribbon Tabs

Action group

Other

Action

Close

Application

Description

Toggle

: Allows entering and terminating history mode using the same object (for example a button).

Show Dialog

: Lets the user select a period of time, for which to show trend viewer history.

Closes the runtime application in a PC project. In an operator panel, the action closes the application, and then the application is restarted by the shell afterwards.

Copies the debug log to a USB memory.

Copy Debug

Log to USB

Memory

Disable Debug

Logger

Enable Debug

Logger

Run

Scroll Left

Scroll Right

Set Date and

Time

Set Language

Disables the debug logger.

Enables the debug logger.

Starts an external application

Scrolls the screen carousel object left

Scrolls the screen carousel object right

Allows changing date and time in the operator panel

Sets the language in the operator panel to the selected language

Allows changing time zone, region and daylight saving settings in the operator panel

Set Time Zone,

Region and

Daylight Saving

Show Backlight

Settings

Show IP

Settings

Allows changing backlight settings in the

Operator panel

Shows the IP settings in the Operator panel

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

311

8.8.10

Multiple Actions

Multiple actions can be configured by clicking small arrow in the lower right corner of any action group.

Ribbon Tabs

Note the small arrow in the lower right corner

The properties window allows configuring and sorting additional actions. The actions available depend of which object is selected in the screen prior to selecting the Actions ribbon tab.

After configuring multiple actions, this is indicated for the action group on the

Actions tab.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

312

Trend Viewer

9 Trend Viewer

This section describes the trend viewer object. Trend Viewers are used to present chronological data from controller tags. The curves in a trend viewer can have different sources of data.

The source of data can be a log item for a data logger. The values of the tag connected to the log item is then stored in the projects database.

The source can also be a Tag. The trend viewer curve then only shows real-time values and is stored in a RAM cache.

Related information

Database

Database Export

9.1 Defining Trend Viewer Objects

It is possible to define several independent trend viewer objects, in the same screen or in different screens. The number of trend viewer curves is limited only by the available amount of memory in the panel.

Note:

A large number of trend viewer pens and short sampling intervals may affect communication performance.

Communication Performance

Related information

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

313

Trend Viewer

9.1.1

Adding a Trend Viewer Object

A trend viewer object is added to a screen from the Objects group on the Home ribbon tab.

Settings for the trend viewer object are available from the General ribbon tab while the trend viewer object is selected:

Curves Group

Trend viewer curves are defined using the

Edit Curves

control.

Parameter

Add

Remove

Name

Tag

Log Item

Expression

Color

Thickness

Minimum Value Tag

Maximum Value Tag

Description

Adds a new curve to the trend viewer object

Removes the selected curve from the trend viewer object

The symbolic name of the curve. This name is shown if a

Trend Viewer Legend

is used.

The tag to present values for

The item to be logged

Expression on a curve is evaluated and applied when the curve is drawn. If the expression value when the tag is logged or cached is of interest, the expression on the log item or the tag can be used. See section

Expressions

The color of the curve

Line thickness

A tag that dynamically sets what value on the curve that corresponds to the minimum value of the Y axis. This property will scale the curve when the value of the tag is different from the minimum value of the Y axis (optional).

The tag that dynamically sets what value on the curve that corresponds to the maximum value of the Y axis. This property will scale the curve when the value of the tag is different from the maximum value of the Y axis (optional)

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

314

Trend Viewer

Dynamics Group

Several trend viewer properties can be made dynamic, i. e. dependent on tag values. This may be useful, for example, when wanting to present trend viewer values of different formats in the same trend viewer object.

If dynamic trend viewer properties are used, the corresponding property settings made in the Value Scale group for the trend viewer object are ignored.

Parameter

Value Scale Min / Value

Scale Max

Time Span

Time Offset in History

Mode

Description

Minimum/maximum value of the Y-scale. The design mode value is used only for increased understanding in design time when tag values do not affect the minimum and maximum values.

The time span of the X-axis in seconds.

Makes it possible to use an offset to step back in history mode. The start value is when history mode was entered.

The unit is seconds.

Value Scale Group

The value scale group controls the vertical scale (y-axis). If dynamic trend viewer properties are used, the settings made for these properties in the value scale group will be ignored.

Parameter

Min Value/Max Value

Major Ticks

Minor Ticks

Description

Start/end value of scale

Number of labeled scale marks on the scale

Number of scale ticks between two adjacent major ticks

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

315

Trend Viewer

Time Scale Group

Parameter

Time Range

Major Ticks

Description

Visible time span for a trend viewer in Hour:Minute:Second format

Number of labeled time marks. This property will be ignored in

Historical Mode in Trend Viewer

.

Style Group

Style

Parameter Description

Predefined graphical styles for the trend viewer

Visibility Group

Scale

Parameter

Grid

Description

When unchecked, the scale color of the trend is made transparent. Scale color is set from

Other Colors

in the

Format group on the Home ribbon tab.

When unchecked, the grid color of the trend viewer is made transparent. Grid color is set from

Other Colors

in the Format group on the Home ribbon tab.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

316

Trend Viewer

9.1.2

Trend Viewer Legend

In runtime, it is possible to display a trend viewer legend tool using the Show

Trend Viewer Legend action. The trend viewer legend tool is a floating window that displays the name and color of the curves in the current trend viewer object.

Curves can be made invisible by clicking the visibility icon.

Use the needle directly in the trend viewer to select a specific occasion. The values of all curves at the current position are displayed in the trend viewer legend tool.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

317

Trend Viewer

9.2 Historical Mode in Trend Viewer

To be able to show historical data in a trend viewer, the curves needs to be connected to log items from a data logger.

To show trend viewer history, it is necessary to define trend actions to show and close the historical trend viewer. These actions can for example be programmed as button click actions. It is also possible to let the user select a time period.

Major ticks

settings for time axis will be ignored in historical trend viewers. In historical trend viewers the date and time will be viewed at start and end time. The text “history” is visible in the middle of the time axis.

Related information

Performance in the Operator Panel

Database

Click Action Trigger

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

318

Data Logger

10 Data Logger

Data can be logged and saved in the iX Developer database.

Any number of tags can be connected to a data logger, and data values irrespective of type can be logged. A project can have multiple data loggers with different sampling alternatives.

When installing iX Developer, a Database Viewer is automatically installed and available from Windows Start menu. The Database Viewer makes it possible to open the database file and inspect logged data, and to export the file to Excel.

Logged data can also be viewed in the trend viewer object by selecting a LogItem for a curve in the Edit Curves dialog.

Note:

Logging of data consumes system resources and memory. To save memory, it is preferable that all LogItems that should be logged with the same sampling intervals are placed in the same data logger.

Any individual data logger database can be exported in csv format using the

Database Export

action. It is recommended to use the database export method rather than the backup method.

Database

Database Export

Adding a Trend Viewer Object

Related information

10.1 Data Logging Strategies

Logging of data can be made at time intervals or based on changed tag values.

Logging of data can be made either by collecting all samples at every log event, or by collecting only changed values. Collecting only changed values saves memory and improves performance.

10.1.1

Logging Based on Time Interval

To collect data that changes frequently, logging data based on time interval is recommended.

10.1.2

Logging Based on Changed Tag Value

To control sampling of data by other means than regular time interval, you have to set up a separate tag to be used as a trigger. When the value of the trigger tag changes the log item is logged.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

319

10.2 Adding a Data Logger

A data logger can be added to the project from the Insert ribbon tab. The data logger configuration pages are used to set up which values to log.

Data Logger

Name

Parameter

Tag

Expression

Description

Symbolic name for the logged tag

Tag to log

See section

Expressions

Clicking the

Settings

button accesses the Data Logger settings.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

320

General Settings

Actions

Related information

Data Logger

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

321

Data Logger

10.2.1

Parameter

Table name

Log with interval

Log on tag event

Log changes only

General Settings

Max number of logged rows

Description

The name of the data logger table. This name is the same as the data logger name.

To collect data that changes frequently, use the

Log with interval of

option, and define time interval in seconds.

Minimum interval is 0.1 second for PC projects and 1 second for panel projects.

To control sampling of data by other means than regular time interval, select the

Log on tag event

option, and select the tag to use as trigger. Data will be sampled when the tag value changes.

By logging changes only saves memory. The option

Log changes only

can be combined with either the “

Log with interval of

” or the “

Log on object event

” option. Data will only be logged if the value differs from the last logged value.

The maximum number of tag values to save in the database. When the number of collected items becomes larger than the set value, the oldest item will be overwritten. The value must be within the size of the available amount of memory in the operator panel in runtime.

Database

Click Action Trigger

10.2.2

Actions

Related information

Event

LogItemValueChanged

LogValuesUpdated

Description

When a value of an particular log item has changed

When any log value is updated

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

322

Scheduler

11 Scheduler

A scheduler is used to control tags in relation to the real-time clock. This function is used to control events in the process, for example starting and stopping motors, at specific predefined calendar times.

11.1 Scheduler Set Up

The scheduler configuration pages are used to set up scheduler jobs, which can include a set of tags with associated start and stop times.

11.1.1

Adding a Scheduler

A scheduler can be added to the project from the Insert ribbon tab.

The scheduler configuration page will open in the desktop when a scheduler function is created or selected.

Name

Period

Parameter

Start Date/Start Time

Duration

Tag

Stop Time Enable

Stop Date/Stop Time

Action

Description

A symbolic name for the scheduled event.

Set to Once (default) or to a regular interval (every minute, hour, day, week, month or year).

The date and time for the first scheduled event.

The length of the event.

A digital tag, which is set to 1 during the specified interval.

When checked, Stop Date and Stop Time, instead of

Duration, can be used to determine the end of the event.

The end date and time of the event. Also resets the defined

Tag to 0. Used when Stop Time Enable is checked.

Click the button to configure an action to be performed when the scheduled event is activated/deactivated.

Note:

Make sure not to use the same trigger tag for two different schedulers. When the first scheduler is finished, its trigger tag is reset, and the second scheduler will not be triggered.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

323

12 Reports

The report generator allows generating Excel reports based on an Microsoft Excel made report template.

The generated report can be output to a printer or saved as an Excel file.

12.1 Reports Template Set up

The tag data to be displayed in the report file are set up in the template file using

“placeholders”.

The placeholders acts as substitute for the actual tag data that is to be inserted when the report is generated in iX Runtime.

To add a placeholder, enter the following text inside a cell in the Excel report template:

<#Tag(TagName)>

Replace “TagName” with the actual name of the tag to be displayed.

When the template file is complete it needs to be added to the iX Developer project.

Note:

The tag placeholders can only be used in the cells of the Excel template file, they can not be used in, for example, Microsoft Excel WordArt texts.

•

•

•

12.1.1

Limitations

Microsoft Excel xlsx format is not supported by the report generator.

Reports containing charts and pictures can not be printed from a panel target.

The report generation is not an instant process. It may elapse a shorter period of time between the first sampled tag and the last sampled tag, depending on the number of tags to process.

Reports

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

324

12.1.2

Database Driven Reports

To be able to create database driven reports, the report template must be prepared as described in these instructions:

Configuration Sheet

The configuration sheet is a repository where configurations on the Microsoft

Excel report template can be made. This sheet will not be visible in the generated report.

1. Create a new worksheet in the report template. Name the sheet <#Config>.

2. Row 10, and all rows below, in column A and B can be used to configure the

SQL queries. Enter the SQL query in column B. Use the corresponding cell in column A to enter a name for the query. The name will be used to refer to the query in the report template.

Enter the SQL queries in the following format:

SQL(DatabaseName; SQL query)

Example

: SQL(General; SELECT * FROM DataLogger1)

There are two available databases: General and AuditTrail.

Reports

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

325

Present the Database Data in the Report

The data retrieved from the SQL database, using the queries in the configuration sheet, can be presented in the report using “named ranges” in Microsoft Excel.

A named range is created in Microsoft Excel by following these steps:

1. Select the cells to be included in a named range.

2. Click the

Define name

command from the

Insert

menu. (In Excel 2007, go to the

Formulas

tab and choose

Name Manager

).

3. Enter a name for the range. The name must be entered in the following format:

“__QueryName__”.

Replace “QueryName” with the name that you have chosen for your SQL query.

To present the data in the report, enter the following syntax into the cells included in the named range:

<#QueryName.DatabaseColumnName>

Replace the “DatabaseColumnName” entry with the actual name of the table in the SQL database that you wish to present in the report.

Note:

It is possible to use the named range cells in Microsoft Excel charts and functions.

To be able to use the named range in functions, an empty row must be inserted under the named range cells. This empty row must also be included in the function.

Related information

Adding a Report

12.2 Reports Set Up

The reports configuration page are available from the Insert ribbon tab.

Related information

Insert Ribbon Tab

Reports

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

326

12.3 Adding a Report

Add a Microsoft Excel report template by pressing

Add

in the reports configuration page. In the appearing Add report dialog, type in or browse to the location of the Excel template file.

If any changes are made to a report template after it has been uploaded to the project, the template has to be uploaded again.

The template files being added to the project must have unique file names.

Reports

Name

Parameter

File name

Description

A symbolic name for the report.

The name of the Microsoft Excel report template.

The

Show Selection/Show All

button can be used to set up a filter of displayed items.

Related information

Performance in the Operator Panel

Filtering Items

Configuration Pages

Action Groups

Output Devices Group

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

327

Recipe Management

13 Recipe Management

Recipes make it possible for a set of tags to be saved in the operator panel to be downloaded at later time. The operator can download a saved recipe to the controller, which will start working with the new values. Recipe libraries consisting of recipes with different sets of parameters can be created, allowing reuse of large sets of parameters.

Recipes can be created during the design of the project or from the operator panel.

Recipe data is stored in the operator panel database. Recipe handling functions such as loading, storing, copying and deleting recipes are handled with actions.

Related information

Database

Actions Ribbon Tab

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

328

Recipe Management

13.1 Recipe Setup

Recipes consist of a set of recipe tags and of recipe data (values).

13.1.1

Adding a Recipe Manager

The recipe function is added to the project from the Insert ribbon tab. The recipe configuration pages are used to manage tag sets and values via the Tag

Configuration tab and the Runtime Data tab.

Tag Configuration Tab

First add tags to be used by the recipe function from the tags configuration page.

Then define a set of recipe items on the Tag Configuration tab of the Recipe function, and connect them to the tags you defined. The data type is already set in the configuration of the tags.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

329

Recipe Management

Runtime Data Tab

The actual recipes are created under the Runtime Data tab. Give the recipe a title, and type a value for each recipe item. A recipe can include a maximum of 256 items.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

330

Recipe Management

13.2 Recipes in the Operator Panel

Some recipe actions can be performed by the operator in runtime.

13.2.1

Loading Recipes

Recipes can be transferred to the controller using a

Load recipe

action when the operator panel is running. This means that the recipe values are transferred to the controller. A list of available recipes is displayed when the

Load recipe

action is activated. Select a recipe in the list and press [

Enter

] to make the controller run with the downloaded values.

13.2.2

Saving Recipes

The

Save recipe

action can be used when the operator panel is running. Tags defined on the Tag Configuration tab are included in the recipe. Corresponding tag values are stored in the selected recipe file when

Save recipe

is performed. It is possible to define an explicit recipe, that will be overwritten if it already exists when performing the Save Recipe action.

13.2.3

Creating Recipes in the Operator

Panel

The Save recipe action is also used to create recipes in runtime. Instead of defining an explicit recipe to overwrite, the recipe data field is left open. In this case, the operator will be prompted to save the recipe with any name, or to overwrite an existing recipe.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

331

Recipe Management

13.2.4

Editing Recipes Offline

It is possible to edit existing recipes in the panel without transferring values to the controller, by setting the recipe tags in offline mode. Recipe tags in offline mode will not receive any data from the controller, and no values will be written to the controller.

In offline mode, the Load recipe and Save recipe actions will not affect values in the controller.

Note:

Internal tags may be used for recipes, but will not be affected by offline mode.

Actions are used to start and end offline mode:

Action

Start offline recipe editing

End offline recipe editing

Description

Sets the tags in the specified recipe in offline mode. A notification message is shown.

Sets the tags in the specified recipe in online mode, and the tags are updated from the controller.

A notification message is displayed during offline mode.

Example

1. Click

Recipe

on the Insert ribbon tab.

The Recipe configuration page opens in the desktop area.

2. Add recipe tags on the

Tag Configuration

tab of the Recipe configuration page and connect them to controller tags.

3. Add a recipe on the

Runtime Data

tab.

4. Create a screen with four buttons.

5. Connect two of the buttons to the

Load Recipe

and

Save Recipe

actions.

Select the recipe title from the Runtime Data tab for

Recipe Data

.

6. Connect the other two buttons to the

Start offline recipe editing

and

End offline recipe editing

actions.

7. Run the project and test the functionality: a. Click

Start offline recipe editing

.

The tags are set in offline mode.

b. Click

Start offline recipe editing

.

The tags are filled with data from the recipe.

c. Change the data.

d. Click

Save recipe

.

The data in the tags is written to the recipe.

e. Click

End offline recipe editing

.

The tags are set in online mode and the values are updated with data from the controller.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

332

Recipe Management

13.3 Recipe Export

A recipe can be exported as a .csv file and saved to a USB stick, an external memory card or to the project files folder. The export is configured through the “

Export

Recipe

” action available from the Recipe action group.

Note:

Recipe export is not supported during project simulation.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

333

13.3.1

Recipe Management

Recipe Export from an Operator

Panel Target

It is possible to select

export to USB

,

export to external memory card

or

export to the Project Files folder

, and also setting another name of the export file.

It is also possible to select the requested delimiter in the .csv file (comma or semicolon).

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

334

13.3.2

Recipe Management

Recipe Export from a PC Target

It is possible to select

Browse and Select an export path

,

Export to Path

or the

Export to Project Files folder

, and also setting another name of the export file.

The

Browse and Select an export path

option allows browsing for desired export destination in runtime. This may be useful if available folders in runtime are unknown when designing the project.

Select the

Export to Path

option when you want to set the path when designing the project. If the pre-defined path is not valid in runtime, the operator may browse the PC environment by clicking a browse button.

It is also possible to select the requested delimiter in the .csv file (comma or semicolon).

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

335

Recipe Management

13.4 Recipe Import

A recipe that previously has been exported as a .csv file, can be imported back into recipe database. The import is configured through the “

Import Recipe

” action available from the Recipe Action group.

Note:

Recipe import is not supported during project simulation.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

336

13.4.1

Recipe Management

Recipe Import to an Operator Panel

Target

It is possible to import the csv file using the

Import from USB

,

Import from external memory card

or the

Import from Project Files folder

selections and also setting the name of the import file.

It is also possible to select the requested delimiter in the .csv file (comma or semicolon).

It can be selected whether to ignore the new data or replace the old data, if the recipe data already exists.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

337

13.4.2

Recipe Import to a PC Target

Recipe Management

It is possible to select

Browse and Select a path for import file

,

Import from path

or

Import from Project Files folder

, and also setting the name of the import file.

The

Browse and Select a path for import file

option allows browsing for desired import destination in runtime. This may be useful if available folders in runtime are unknown when designing the project.

Select the

Import from path

option when you want to set the path when designing the project.

It is also possible to select the requested delimiter in the .csv file (comma or semicolon).

It can be selected whether to ignore the new data or replace the old data, if the recipes already exists.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

338

Function Keys

14 Function Keys

Function keys can be configured to run actions or to run scripts.

14.1 Definitions

A standard PC keyboard has 12 function keys, F1 - F12.

A function key can be configured to affect only a particular screen or to be global.

Global function keys behave identically for all screens. A global definition can always be accessed when the operator panel is running, provided that the current screen does not have a screen definition for that function key. Screen function keys have higher priority than global function keys. Function keys included in background screens have lower priority than screen function keys, but higher priority than global function keys.

Note:

It is not possible to restrict use of function keys based on security groups/login.

The Function keys function is pre-defined in the Project Explorer when a keyboard panel is selected as target, for configuration of the function keys of the selected panel. For touch panel and PC targets, the Function keys function is added via the

Insert

ribbon tab, and allows configuration of up to 24 function keys

(even if the connected keyboard does not support more than 12 function keys).

When converting a keyboard panel project to a touch panel or PC project, the function keys will still be included in the project. When converting a touch panel or PC project to a keyboard panel project, you will need to add the function keys from the

Insert

ribbon tab.

Related information

Security Management

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

339

14.1.1

Keyboard Operated Panels

The keys of a keyboard operated panel is numbered according to below:

Function Keys

The number of function keys differ between different panel models, but the numbering method is the same: The numbering starts from top downwards on the left side, continues from top downwards on the right side, and finishes from left to right at the bottom row.

The keyboard operated panels also include function keys with pre-defined functions, such as

Prev

,

Next

and

Home

. These are used to navigate between screens in the running project. When dialogs are opened, the

Prev

and

Next

keys are used to navigate between objects in the dialog.

Special functionality for the pre-defined function keys is also used for the Alarm

Viewer object in runtime.

Related information

Alarm Viewer in Keyboard Operated Panels

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

340

Function Keys

14.2 Configuring Function Keys

Function keys can be configured to run actions or to run scripts.

14.2.1

Function Key Actions

To define function key actions:

1. Click on

Function Keys

in the Project Explorer to open the function keys configuration page.

2. Select

Global

or

Screen

.

3. Select the function key to be defined.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

341

Function Keys

4. Click on the button next to the action to display the actions editor. Define the action to be performed when the function key is pressed or released.

Multiple actions can be configured for a function key.

It is only possible to activate two tags connected to function keys at the same time.

This means that if more than two function keys are pressed at the same time, only the first two will be activated.

Note:

The function keys will be disabled if the backlight of the panel is disabled.

Related information

Function Key Action Triggers

Multiple Actions

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

342

Function Keys

14.2.2

Function Key Scripts

To define a script for a function key:

1. Click on

Function Keys

in the Project Explorer to open the function keys configuration page.

2. Select the function key to be defined.

3. Select script view mode by clicking

Script

in the lower part of the desktop area.

4. Click on the desired button node. Double-click on the

KeyDown

node. Edit the script code to be performed.

Example:

The following C# code sets up function key F12 to perform an acknowledge of all alarms:

Script

Related information

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

343

Alarm Management

15 Alarm Management

An alarm is used to call attention to an event that requires immediate action. An alarm is set when a certain condition is met. An alarm condition is designed as a logical evaluation of a tag value. Alarms can be divided into groups to create an order of priority.

Alarm notification can be made in the following ways:

Alarm Indicator

Alarm Viewer

Distribution via SMS, e-mail or printer via the

Alarm Distributor

The alarm server database can be exported in csv format using the

Database

Export

action.

Related information

Database Export

15.1 Alarm Conditions

Alarms can assume the following conditions:

Alarm condition

Active

Inactive

Acknowledged

Normal

Description

The alarm condition is met, and the alarm is not acknowledged

The alarm has returned to normal condition, but has not been acknowledged

The alarm condition is still met, but the alarm is acknowledged

The alarm has returned to normal condition and has been acknowledged

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

344

Alarm Management

15.2 Alarm Server

The alarm server function is predefined in the Project Explorer. Clicking on it opens the alarm server configuration pages in the desktop.

General alarm server properties are available by clicking the

Settings

button.

The Properties window is divided into General, Alarm Distribution and Actions.

15.2.1

General Settings

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

345

Alarm Management

Settings

Some alarm server functions are based on changed tag values:

Alarm function

Remote acknowledge

Clear alarms

Enable/disable alarms

Description

Performs remote acknowledge of all current alarms when the tag value is 1

Removes all alarms from the alarm server when the tag value is 1

Enables the alarm server when the tag value is 1

Show Alarm Indicator

Select for which alarm statuses the alarm indicator is to be displayed.

Log Settings

Parameter

Max Number of Logged

Rows

Description

The maximum number of alarms to save in the database. If the number of collected items becomes larger than the set value, the oldest item will be deleted. The value must be within the size of the available amount of memory in the operator panel in runtime.

Repeat Counter

To avoid that an alarm that is triggered repeatedly results in multiple entries in the alarm list,

Repeat Count

can be used. The current alarm will then only appear once in the alarm list, and number of times the alarm is triggered will be included in the alarm text. For display in the Alarm Viewer and for logging, select whether to show the time of the first or last occurrence of the alarm.

15.2.2

Alarm Server Events and Actions

Actions can be configured for the entire alarm server. One or multiple actions can be configured when a particular alarm server event occurs.

Select

Actions

in the Alarm Server properties page to configure actions for the alarm server.

Actions for the following alarm server events can be configured:

Alarm Acknowledge

The specified actions will be triggered once for every alarm that is acknowledged.

The actions will be applied for the individual alarm first. If no action is specified for the alarm, the actions will be applied for the group. If no action is specified for the group, the actions will be applied for the alarm server.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

346

Alarm Management

Alarm Active

The specified actions will be triggered once for every alarm that becomes active.

The actions will be applied for the individual alarm first. If no action is specified for the alarm, the actions will be applied for the group. If no action is specified for the group, the actions will be applied for the alarm server.

Alarm Deleted

The specified actions will be triggered once when the

Clear

button in the alarm viewer is pressed, if at least one alarm is deleted.

Alarm Event Info Requested

The specified actions for the selected alarm will be triggered when the

Info

button in the alarm viewer is pressed.

The actions will be applied for the individual alarm first. If no action is specified for the alarm, the actions will be applied for the group. If no action is specified for the group, the actions will be applied for the alarm server.

Alarm Inactive

The specified actions will be triggered once for each alarm, for which the alarm condition is no longer met.

The actions will be applied for the individual alarm first. If no action is specified for the alarm, the actions will be applied for the group. If no action is specified for the group, the actions will be applied for the alarm server.

Alarm Normal

The specified actions will be triggered once for each acknowledged alarm, for which the alarm condition is no longer met.

Alarms Changed

This event is intended primarily for scripting, in order to avoid performance loss that may occur when many alarms change status at once. Alarms Changed includes status changes based on Alarm Acknowledge, Alarm Active, Alarm

Normal and Alarm Inactive, but not Alarm Deleted.

The specified actions will be triggered once when the status of several alarms change at one occasion. A collection of alarms is returned.

Alarms Deleted

This event is intended primarily for scripting, in order to avoid performance loss that may occur when many alarms are deleted at once, by pressing the

Clear

button in the alarm viewer.

The specified actions will be triggered once when a number of alarms are deleted at one occasion. A collection of alarms is returned.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

347

Alarm Management

Any Acknowledged

The specified actions will be triggered based on alarm logic: when the alarm server toggles between containing acknowledged alarms or not.

Any Active

The specified actions will be triggered based on alarm logic: when the alarm server toggles between containing active alarms or not.

Any Inactive

The specified actions will be triggered based on alarm logic: when the alarm server toggles between containing inactive alarms or not.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

348

Alarm Management

15.2.3

Alarm Distribution Settings

To enable sending alarms to printer, or via SMS or e-mail, the Alarm Distributor is used. In addition to the settings below, the

Enable Distribution

option for the alarm groups or alarm items also has to be checked.

Parameter

Internal/External

IP Number Server

Queue Length

Port Number

Description

Selection of internal or external alarm distributor

The IP address of the external alarm distributor

The number of alarms to be kept in queue for the external alarm distributor. When the queue is full, no more alarms will be added to the queue.

The port number of the external alarm distributor

Related information

Alarm Distributor

Alarm Groups

Alarm Items

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

349

Alarm Management

15.3 Alarm Indicator

As long as there are active alarms in the alarm server, the alarm indicator notify window will be displayed, regardless of which screen is active. The color shows the current alarm status, and can be configured for each of the alarm groups. The indicator starts in the upper left corner of the screen in runtime, but can be moved to any position on the monitor in runtime.

The appearance of the alarm indicator depends on the current alarm status. It will show the most severe status of the alarms in the list. The Alarm Indicator disappears when all alarms have been acknowledged, and all alarms have returned to inactive status.

Select

General

settings in alarm server properties page to decide for which alarm statuses to show the alarm indicator.

Alarm condition

Active

Inactive

Acknowledged

Normal

Description

The alarm condition is met, and the alarm is not acknowledged

The alarm has returned to normal condition, but has not been acknowledged

The alarm condition is met, and the alarm is acknowledged

The alarm has returned to normal condition, and has been acknowledged

Default alarm indication

Flashing red

Flashing green

Flashing green

—

Related information

General Settings

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

350

Alarm Management

15.4 Alarm Items

Alarm items are added from the Alarm Items tab of the alarm server configuration pages.

Click

Add

to define a new alarm.

Name

Parameter

Text

Tag

Expression

Condition

Trigger Value

History

Description

Symbolic name for the alarm item that will show in an alarm viewer.

An optional alarm text that will be shown in the alarm viewer. Parts of the text can be made dynamic by clicking

...

The tag (digital or analog), which generates the alarm when it assumes the specified status.

See section

Expressions

Equal to/Not equal to

: The alarm is set when the value of the tag is equal/not equal to the value specified in the

Trigger Value

field.

Greater than/Less than

: The alarm is set when the value of the tag is greater/less than the value specified in the

Trigger Value

field.

Equal to greater than/Equal to less than

: The alarm is set when the value of the tag is equal to or greater/less than the value specified in the

Trigger Value

field.

Rising/Falling Edge

: The alarm is set when the specified tag goes to one/zero.

Numeric value to trigger alarm with when:

<tag value> <condition> <trigger value> = true.

Specifies when the alarm is to be removed from the alarm list. Checking this box means that the alarm will remain in the list until the list is full. Leaving it unchecked means that the alarm will be removed from the list when it is acknowledged and no longer active. If

Acknowledge

Required

is not checked, the alarm will be removed from the list as soon as it is no longer active.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

351

Alarm Management

Parameter

Acknowledge

Required

Description

Indicates whether the alarm is to be acknowledged or not. Checking the box means that the alarm must be acknowledged, leaving it unchecked means that the alarm returns to normal directly when the alarm status becomes inactive.

A digital tag that acknowledges all the alarm when set to 1

See section

Expressions

Remote Acknowledge

Remote Ack

Expression

Enable Distribution

Repeat Count

Action

Enables distribution of the alarm via printer/SMS/e-mail.

Only available if alarm distribution is enabled for the alarm server. If the

Enable Distribution

option for the alarm group is checked, distribution of individual alarms in the group are automatically enabled.

To avoid that an alarm that is triggered repeatedly results in multiple entries in the alarm list,

Repeat Count

can be used. The current alarm will then only appear once in the alarm list, and the number of times the alarm is triggered will be included in the alarm text. It is also possible to show a

Count

column in the Alarm Viewer. The active time can be shown either for the first time or for the last time the alarm occurred.

Makes it possible to configure one or multiple actions when a particular alarm event occurs for the current alarm.

Note:

An alarm condition is triggered by a fixed value. The trigger value defined for an analog alarm tag cannot be controlled from a register. It is not supported to trigger alarms on intervals.

Related information

Actions and Events for Alarm Items and Alarm Groups

15.4.1

Exporting and Importing Alarm

Items

Alarm items can be exported and imported using the

Import/Export

button in the

Alarms configuration page. The procedure is similar to exporting and importing tags.

Importing and Exporting Tags

Tag Import Example

Related information

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

352

Alarm Management

15.5 Alarm Groups

Alarms can be divided into groups, for example to indicate the priority of the alarms. One alarm group is defined by default.

Color attributes can be individually set for each alarm group. Alarms can be sorted by group in the alarm viewer.

15.5.1

Defining Alarm Groups

Alarm groups are added from the

Alarm Groups

tab of the alarm server configuration pages.

Name

Text

Colors

Parameter

Remote Acknowledge

Remote Ack

Expression

Enable Distribution

Description

An optional name for the alarm group.

An optional text for the alarm group.

Select foreground and background color for each alarm status

A digital tag that acknowledges all the alarms in the group when set to 1

See section

Expressions

Action

Enables distribution of the alarms in the group via printer/SMS/e-mail. Only available if alarm distribution is enabled for the alarm server.

Makes it possible to configure one or multiple actions when a particular alarm event occurs for the current alarm group.

Related information

Actions and Events for Alarm Items and Alarm Groups

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

353

Alarm Management

Actions can be configured for individual alarms or for alarm groups. One or multiple actions can be configured when a particular alarm event occurs for the current alarm or alarm group.

Actions for individual alarms are configured from the

Action

column for the alarm on the

Alarm Items

tab.

Actions for alarm groups are configured from the

Action

column for the alarm group on the

Alarm Groups

tab.

15.6.1

Actions and Events

Actions for the following alarm events and alarm group events can be configured:

Alarm Acknowledge

The specified actions will be triggered when the selected alarm/an alarm in the selected alarm group is acknowledged.

Alarm Active

The specified actions will be triggered when the selected alarm/an alarm in the selected alarm group becomes active.

Alarm Event Info Requested

The specified actions will be triggered when the Info button in the alarm viewer is pressed.

These actions will be applied for the individual alarm first. If no action is specified for the alarm, the actions will be applied for the group. If no action is specified for the group, the actions will be applied for the alarm server.

Alarm Inactive

The specified actions will be triggered when the alarm/an alarm in the selected alarm group becomes inactive.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

354

Alarm Management

15.6.2

Example

The following picture shows two actions configured for when the current alarm goes active, and another action for when the operator presses the

Info

button in runtime.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

355

Alarm Management

15.7 Remote Alarm Server

The alarm server in the iX Developer project can operate as a stand-alone alarm server, processing alarms and showing these in the alarm viewer and alarm indicator. Alternatively, the alarm server can distribute alarms to clients. Each alarm server can function as alarm server and/or alarm client. The remote alarm server functionality is set up via properties.

15.7.1

Remote Alarm Server Limitations

•

•

•

Most functions work exactly the same regardless if a local or remote alarm server is used, but there are a few limitations:

In projects where multiple languages are used, switching language in the alarm server results in using the current language for all new alarm texts.

Alarms distributed before the language was switched in the server will remain in the previous language in the client.

Pressing the Info button in the alarm viewer in runtime will not result in any actions for a remote alarm, unless the same project is used for the server and the client. The script event AlarmInfoRequested can be used instead.

Unless the same project is used for the server and the client, filtering (pressing the Filter button in the alarm viewer) can only be made in runtime for remote alarms, since the remote server may include e.g. alarm groups that are different from the project in which the alarm viewer was configured.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

356

Alarm Management

15.7.2

Remote Alarm Server Properties

The following properties, located in the

Misc

group, need to be set up for the remote alarm server:

Property

MaximumAlarm

EventsToDistribute

ServerMode

ServerPort

Description

The number of events to distribute to the clients. The number of distributed alarms affects performance.

The alarm server can assume the following modes:

Disabled

: The alarm server is disabled and no alarms are processed

Local

: The alarm server processes alarms of its own.

Remote

: Alarms are distributed to remote clients.

Both

: The alarm server processes alarms of its own and also distributes them to remote clients

Any available port. The port needs to correspond to the port setting for the remote alarm client.

Property Grid

Related information

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

357

Alarm Management

15.7.3

Remote Alarm Client

The following properties, located in the

Misc

group, need to be set up for the remote alarm client:

Property

ServerAddress

ServerPort

Description

The IP address of the remote alarm server.

Any available port. The port needs to correspond to the port setting for the remote alarm server.

Property Grid

Related information

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

358

Alarm Management

15.8 Alarm Distributor

The Alarm Distributor makes it possible to send alarm notification via printer,

SMS or e-mail. The function can be enabled internally in a project, or in another operator panel that acts as a server towards several connected clients. Regardless of acting as server or client, distributed alarms are saved temporarily in the local project database to ensure that information is not lost in case of e.g. interrupted power. After receiving alarms from a client, the server will send a confirmation to the client. The alarms will then be removed from the client’s database.

15.8.1

Alarm Distribution Roles

Using Internal Alarm Distribution Server Functions

(Acting as Client and Server)

The following actions are required for using distributed alarm functions in the current project:

Action

Activating distribution of alarms in the project

Enabling internal distribution of alarms

Enabling distribution of alarm groups or individual alarms

Configuration of alarm distribution routes

Configuration of alarm distribution devices

Component

Alarm Distribution

Server

Alarm Server

Alarm Server

Alarm Distribution

Server

Alarm Distribution

Server

Location

Insert

ribbon tab

Settings

button/

Alarm

Distribution

properties

Alarm Groups

or

Alarm

Items

tab

Receivers

,

Alarm Filter

and

Scheduler

tabs

Configure Distribution

Devices

button (e-mail, printer and/or SMS)

Using External Alarm Distribution Server Functions

(Acting as Client)

The following actions are required for using distributed alarm functions in another operator panel/PC project:

Action

Activating distribution of alarms in the project

Enabling external distribution of alarms

Enabling distribution of alarm groups or individual alarms

Component

Alarm Distribution

Server

Alarm Server

Alarm Server

Location

Insert

ribbon tab

Settings

button/

Alarm

Distribution

properties

Alarm Groups

or

Alarm

Items

tab

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

359

Alarm Management

Collecting Alarms for Distribution (Acting as Server)

The following actions are required for using distributed alarm functions in another operator panel/PC project:

Action

Activating distribution of alarms in the project

Configuration of alarm distribution routes

Configuration of alarm distribution devices

15.8.2

Component

Alarm Distribution

Server

Alarm Distribution

Server

Alarm Distribution

Server

Location

Insert

ribbon tab

Receivers

,

Alarm Filter

and

Scheduler

tabs

Configure Distribution

Devices

button (e-mail,

TCP server, printer and/or

SMS)

Adding an Alarm Distributor

The Alarm Distributor can be added to the project from the Insert ribbon tab. The configuration pages are opened in the desktop area.

Route

A route defines a number of filtering rules for distribution of alarms. Multiple routes makes it possible to send different kinds of notifications to various receivers.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

360

Alarm Management

Receivers Tab

The receivers of distributed alarms for each route are set up on the

Receivers

tab.

Address Book

Click on the

Address Book

button to enter names, e-mail addresses and/or phone numbers of the persons that are to be available for selection for distributed alarm messages.

The

Show Selection/Show All

button can be used to set up a filter of displayed items.

The contents of the address book can be exported as a .csv file, and then be imported again after modification using the

Import/Export

button.

Related information

Filtering Items

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

361

Alarm Management

Receiver Selection

Click on the

Receiver Selection

button to set up receivers of each alarm distribution route; via e-mail, SMS and/or printer.

The selected receivers are displayed under

Parallel Receivers

.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

362

Alarm Management

Alarm Filter Tab

Filtering of each alarm distribution route can be configured on the

Alarm Filter

tab. The filtering operates using “and” logic, i.e. the alarm will only be distributed if all conditions are fulfilled. An empty string does not generate a filter condition

(acts as a “wild card”).

Parameter

Alarm Name

Alarm Group

Alarm Text

Alarm Status(es) to distribute

Description

The alarm item to distribute.

The alarm group of which alarm items are to be distributed.

All alarms including this text will be distributed.

Selection of alarm to be distributed, based on alarm status. At least one status must be selected.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

363

Alarm Management

Scheduler Tab

Scheduling of each alarm distribution route can be configured on the Scheduler tab. Only alarms that occur between the start and stop times will be distributed.

Period

Parameter

Day

Start Time/Stop Time

Name

Description

Select daily or weekly alarm distribution

Select weekday, if

Weekly

was selected for

Period

Select start and stop time of the alarm distribution

The name is automatically filled in based on start and stop time, and cannot be edited

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

364

Alarm Management

15.8.3

Configure Distribution Devices

Click the

Configure Distribution Devices

button to set up the different devices.

Related information

Modifying Alarm Distribution Settings in Runtime

Alarm Variables

Variables collected from the alarm server definitions can be included in distributed alarm information. Variables are enclosed by curly brackets; for example “Alarm text: {3}”. The following variables can be used:

7

8

9

5

6

2

3

4

0

1

Number Variable

State

StateTime

AlarmId

AlarmText

AlarmItemDisplay-

Name

Count

ActiveTime

InactiveTime

NormalTime

AcknowledgeTime

Description

The current state of the alarm

The time the alarm entered the current state

A unique alarm ID

Alarm item text

Alarm item name

The number of times the alarm has occurred

The time the alarm became active

The time the alarm became inactive

The time the alarm became normal

The time the alarm was acknowledged

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

365

E-mail Device

Alarm Management

Parameter

From Name

From E-mail Address

SMTP Server Name/IP

Port

Code Page

Authentication Mode

User Name/Password

Retry Sending

Time Interval

Subject

Body

Description

The name of the sender of the e-mail

The e-mail address of the sender of the e-mail

The name or IP address of the SMTP server for sending e-mail

The port number of the e-mail server

The code page consists of a table of values that describes the character set for a particular language. The default code page in iX Developer is 65001 (UTF-8).

Select

None

or

Authenticated Login

User name and password if

Authenticated Login

was selected

Number of retries if the e-mail cannot be delivered

Number of seconds between retries

The e-mail subject;

Alarm Variables

can be used

The e-mail body;

Alarm Variables

can be used

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

366

Printer Device

Alarm Management

Parameter

Buffer settings

Text Font Size

Body

Output Devices Group

Description

Set up the printers buffer settings

The font size of the text to be printed

The body of the printout;

Alarm Variables

can be used

Related information

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

367

Alarm Management

SMS Device

To be able to send alarms via SMS, you have to purchase an SMS Gateway Service.

Parameter

Basic URL for web SMS

Retry Sending

Time Interval

Body

Description

The URL configuration string according to the SMS Gateway

Service supplier that must include two variables: {0} for telephone number and {1} for SMS body

Number of retries if the SMS cannot be delivered

Number of seconds between retries

The SMS body;

Alarm Variables

can be used

TCP Server

Define the TCP server port. This must correspond to the port defined for the

Alarm Distribution

settings for the alarm server.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

368

Alarm Management

15.9 Alarm Distributor Viewer

The Alarm Distributor Viewer is a debug tool, used for test and verification of the alarm distribution setup.

Clicking the

Settings

button in runtime makes it possible to edit the address book and make settings for alarm distribution.

Related information

Modifying Alarm Distribution Settings in Runtime

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

369

Alarm Management

15.10 Alarm Viewer

The alarm viewer can be used to show more detailed alarm information than the alarm indicator. Alarms presented in the Alarm Viewer presents alarm texts from the alarm server. The alarm list shows the latest alarms. It is arranged in alarm group order.

The default design of the alarm viewer depends on the size of the selected operator panel target, in order to allow full visibility and usability of the alarm viewer in the smaller operator panels.

Settings such as font and button width are available in the Property grid.

Settings for the alarm viewer are available from the

General

ribbon tab while the object is selected:

15.10.1 Buttons Group

Parameter

Position

Acknowledge Selected

Acknowledge All

Clear

Filter

Info

Play/Pause

Enable Context Menu

Description

Controls to which of the borders the buttons will line up

Acknowledges currently selected alarms in the alarm viewer

General acknowledge of all current alarms in the alarm viewer

Removes all alarms in the viewer

Allows filtering of alarms in the viewer

Performs the action set by the AlarmEventInfoRequested action

Starts and pauses the alarm viewer

Show alarm viewer commands in context menu in runtime

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

370

Alarm Management

15.10.2 Display Settings Group

Parameter

Configure Columns

Filter Settings

Max Number of Rows

Show Column Headers

Show Summary

Description

Selection and configuration of columns to display in runtime

Filtering of alarm statuses to display in runtime

The maximum number of alarms to display. If the number of alarms does not fit in the object in runtime, scroll bars will be made available. If the number of alarms exceeds the maximum number, the oldest item will be deleted.

Shows/hides the alarm viewers column headers

Shows status information in the bottom of the alarm viewer

15.10.3 Alarm Viewer Commands

In addition to using the alarm viewer buttons, the same functions are available using script.

Related information

Script

Property Grid

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

371

Alarm Management

15.11Alarm Management in Runtime

Alarm notification can be made in the following ways:

Alarm Indicator

Alarm Viewer

Distribution via SMS, e-mail or printer via the

Alarm Distributor

15.11.1 Alarm Acknowledgement

•

•

•

•

An alarm can be acknowledged in the following ways: right-clicking on the alarm line and selecting

Acknowledge

selecting the alarm line and pressing on the

Acknowledge Selected

button pressing the

Acknowledge All

button to acknowledge all current alarms script actions

Inactive alarms that have been acknowledged can be removed from the list by pressing the

Clear

button.

15.11.2 Sorting

Pressing on the column heading in runtime will sort the alarm list by that column.

This will pause the alarm viewer.

15.11.3 Filtering

•

•

Pressing the Filter button in the alarm viewer opens a dialog that allows the user to enter a filtering profile to control which alarms to display in the alarm list.

Filtering can be made based on any combination of the following conditions:

Alarm group: The first column in the filter window shows the alarm group name. Check the Enable box to show alarms from the group.

Alarm status: Displays alarms with the status corresponding to the checked status values.

15.11.4 Play/Pause Button

•

•

•

The alarm viewer window can be paused from being updated with incoming alarms using the Play/Pause button. This allows the operator to inspect and sort the list without interference from any incoming alarms. The list will also pause when an alarm is selected.

The alarm list will start updating again when the Play button is pressed the operator changes screen and returns to the same screen (or goes to another screen showing the alarm viewer) after a 5 minute time-out

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

372

Alarm Management

15.11.5 Info Button

Pressing the Info button in the alarm viewer will trigger the action specified in the

AlarmEventInfoRequested

group on the

Actions

tab, when an item in the alarm server is selected.

This action will be applied for the individual alarm first. If no action is specified for the alarm, the action will be applied for the group. If no action is specified for the group, the action will be applied for the alarm server.

Related information

Alarm Groups

Alarm Conditions

Alarm Event Info Requested

15.11.6 Alarm Viewer in Keyboard Operated

Panels

Some of the built-in arrow keys and special keys (such as ACK and Enter) in the keyboard operated panels have special functions in runtime when the Alarm

Viewer object is included in the current screen.

Enter

Key

Backspace

ACK

Left arrow

Right arrow

Description

Pressing

Enter

when the cursor is outside of the Alarm

Viewer moves the cursor inside the Alarm Viewer.

Pressing

Backspace

when the cursor is inside the Alarm

Viewer moves the cursor to outside of the Alarm Viewer.

Pressing

ACK

when the cursor is outside of or inside the

Alarm Viewer acknowledges all alarms.

Pressing the

Left

arrow when the cursor is inside the Alarm

Viewer puts focus on the alarm list.

Pressing the

Right

arrow when the cursor is inside the

Alarm Viewer puts focus on the Alarm Viewer buttons.

Related information

Keyboard Operated Panels

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

373

Alarm Management

15.11.7 Modifying Alarm Distribution

Settings in Runtime

It is possible to configure actions, or to use the Alarm Distribution Viewer to modify the address book and alarm distribution settings in runtime.

Note:

If the Alarm Distribution Viewer or alarm distribution actions are used in runtime, it is possible that alarm distribution settings have been modified. Next time you download a project to the operator panel, you will get a notification, and selection to overwrite panel settings or not.

Address Book

Action Groups

Output Devices

Action Groups

Related information

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

374

Security Management

16 Security Management

Using security groups and passwords in the operator panel makes it possible to create a security system for the project. Operators can easily be assigned different authorizations in the project to restrict access to objects and functions. Security group information and passwords are stored in the project database.

It is not necessary to use this function if unrestricted access is acceptable. The security function is a predefined component of the Project Explorer.

16.1 General Security Settings

General settings for the security function are available by clicking on

Security

in the Project Explorer, selecting the

Users

tab and clicking the

Settings

button.

Parameter

Select action on access denied

Select visibility

Description

When a users’s access rights are not sufficient to e.g. modify an object or carry out an action, it is possible to display an access denied message or opening a login dialog. Selecting

None

performs no action.

When a user with insufficient access rights tries to affect an object, it is possible to specify visibility for those objects:

Disabled

: Only users with sufficient access rights can affect the object. The object is visible, but disabled, for users with insufficient access rights.

Hidden

: Only users with sufficient access rights can see the object. The object is invisible for users with insufficient access rights

Normal

: Only users with sufficient access rights can affect the object. The object looks normal for users with insufficient access rights

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

375

Security Management

Parameter

Automatic logout

Description

Checking the box makes it possible to log out users automatically after a certain number of minutes of inactivity.

After an automatic logout is executed, a screen jump to the start screen will be performed.

Note:

The automatic logout will not be carried out if a communication error (COM error) is active in the panel. After removing the communication error from the panel, the automatic logout will be performed within the specified time, calculated from when the communication was reestablished.

16.1.1

Password Rules Properties

Allows setting a minimum number of characters for passwords.

Related information

Logging In and Logging Out

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

376

Security Management

16.2 Security Groups

Security groups are defined on the

Groups

tab of the security configuration page.

When objects and screens have been set up with restricted access, the current user must belong to a specific security group in order to control or see the object or screen.

16.2.1

Creating Security Groups

A new security group in a project is defined by clicking on

Security

in the Project

Explorer, selecting the

Groups

tab and clicking

Add

.

Name

Parameter

Users

Users Invisible in

Runtime

Description

Any alphanumeric string, beginning with a letter (a-z, A-Z)

Selection of users defined on the

Users

tab to be included in the group

When the box is checked, the users in the current group will not be available for selection from the

Login

dialog in runtime. It will still be possible to type in the user name and password to login.

Operator Panels targets only: In order to enable the possibility to manually enter a user name and password, it is necessary to click the “Login” header on the Login dialog in runtime. Doing so and then clicking on the

User

—field will present the user with a keyboard on which a user name can be entered.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

377

Security Management

16.3 Users

Users and passwords for login are defined on the

Users

tab of the security configuration page.

Parameter

Name

Password

Description

Groups

Description

Any alphanumeric string, beginning with a letter (a-z, A-Z)

Any alphanumeric string; minimum length according to

Password Rules

properties. The password is converted to asterisks as you leave the password input cell.

An optional description of the user

Selection of security groups for the user

It is also possible to add users and change passwords directly in a running project, using the

Show Users Dialog

action.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

378

Security Management

16.3.1

Logging In and Logging Out

The login dialog can be displayed in runtime by, for example, clicking a button, for which the

Login

action has been specified. It is possible to change password from the login dialog.

The login dialog lists all users that have been configured for the current project, except for users in groups for which

Users Invisible in Runtime

was selected.

It is also possible to configure a general behavior that brings up the login dialog any time a user tries to affect an object that is not within the current user’s access rights.

This behavior is configured from the Properties window for the Security function, and selecting

ShowLoginDialog

for action on access denied.

The

Logout

action is used to perform a logout.

Users may also be logged out automatically after a certain number of minutes of inactivity by configuring

Automatic logout

in the

Properties

window for the

Security function.

Note:

After logging out, the function

Show Previous Screen

for function keys and touch keys will be ignored. This is a security feature to prevent unauthorized persons from accessing screens protected by passwords.

Related information

General Security Settings

Actions Ribbon Tab

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

379

Security Management

16.4 Object Security and Visibility

Object access can be restricted to a certain security group. Each security group contains a set of users and each user has an individual password. To be able to control an object with a security setting, the user must belong to the defined security group, and has to login.

Object security is controlled by selecting the object, and then opening the

Tag/Security group of the Home or General ribbon tabs.

When no security is set for an object, the object will be available to everyone, i.e.

login will not be requested.

Note:

Security has higher priority than dynamics.

It is not possible to set security on function keys.

The visibility and behavior settings specified in the security manager will be used when a security group is set but no explicit visibility is specified. The following options can be set:

Default

Visibility

Disabled

Hidden

Normal

Description

The object looks normal and is visible for anyone.

Only users in the selected security groups can affect the object. The object is visible but disabled and greyed out, for users with insufficient access rights.

Only users in the selected security groups can see the object. The object is invisible for users with insufficient access rights.

Only users in the selected security groups can affect the object. The object looks normal for users with insufficient access rights.

Related information

Tag/Security Group

Function Keys

Screen Security

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

380

Language Management

17 Language Management

iX Developer supports multilingual applications. Translation of texts and system texts can be performed directly in the application, or via export to a text file to be translated in other software. The file is imported to the application after translation.

The application language can be changed in runtime, for example based on a tag value.

17.1 Setting Up Multiple Languages

The multiple languages function is included in the application by default and is located in the Functions folder in the Project Explorer.

The multiple languages configuration pages consist of the Texts, System Texts and Languages tabs.

17.1.1

Adding Languages

1. Click on the

Multiple Languages

function to open its configuration pages.

2. Select the

Languages

tab.

3. Add languages by selecting them from the drop-down list.

The

Use in Runtime

setting makes the language available in runtime. Under

Keyboard Layout

, it is possible to select different layouts for the virtual keyboard, used for alphanumerical input in runtime.

Each added language is assigned an index number. Index number 0 is reserved for the default language (the language that the application was first created in).

The

Add

and

Delete

buttons can be used to add and delete languages.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

381

Language Management

The

Settings

button allows connecting the language to a tag. This makes it possible to change the project language based on a changed value.

Use the

Show Selection/Show All

button if you want to filter the languages in the current view.

Related information

Virtual Keyboard

Filtering Items

17.2 System Texts

System texts belong to functions (e.g. alarm server or security), to the system

(e.g. time zone) and to objects (e.g. buttons or sliders), excluding text that the developer has entered.

Select the

System Texts

tab in the Multiple Languages configuration pages to edit system texts.

Use the

Show Selection/Show All

button if you want to filter the current view.

The

Import/Export

button can be used to export a system language to a text file for translation, and then import the language after translation.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

382

Language Management

Filtering Items

Exporting Languages

Importing Languages

17.3 User Texts

Related information

Texts that have been added to objects by the developer are available from the

Texts

tab in the Multiple Languages configuration pages. The texts in the default language can be edited as well.

Use the

Show Selection/Show All

button if you want to filter the current view.

The

Import/Export

button can be used to export a system language to a text file for translation, and then import the language after translation.

Note:

When an object is connected to a text in the Text library, the object’s internal denomination (that is not displayed in runtime) will be presented in grey color in the

Texts list, to indicate that editing the text will not affect the runtime project.

Related information

Filtering Items

Exporting Languages

Importing Languages

Text Library

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

383

Language Management

17.4 Automatic Translation

iX Developer includes a translation tool that uses Microsoft Bing Translator to offer quick translations of user-defined or system texts free of charge.

Note:

Automatic translations provide limited functionality; especially combination of words or words with synonyms may be returned as incorrect translations.

The translation tool is available by clicking

Translate

on the Texts or System Texts tabs of the Multiple Languages configuration pages. Each language is translated separately.

Parameter

Translation Provider

Reference Language

Only translate items that have not yet been translated

Translate from

Translate to

Description

Select translation provider among available providers.

Microsoft Bing Translator is the only translation provider in iX Developer.

Select reference language; i.e. the language in which the project was created.

Unchecking the box replaces also already translated items in the project.

Selection of source language for the translation operation; the default language (reference language) or one of the languages that have been added to the project.

Selection of target language for the translation operation.

Note:

Since the translation tool accesses online translation providers, the translation operation may sometimes be paused or delayed due to an excess of online users.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

384

Language Management

17.5 Exporting Languages

Languages can be exported to a text file for e.g. translation.

1. Select

Export

from the

Import/Export

button.

2. Specify format, location, delimiter (for text file format) and language selection, and click

OK

.

Parameter

Format

Path

Delimiter

Languages

Description

Select format of the exported file; text file or Excel file.

Browse to the location for the exported file

If

Text file

format was selected, select delimiter from the drop-down list; comma, semicolon, space or tab

Select which languages to export

The exported file will also include the default language.

Note:

After having exported user/system texts with national characters to be edited in

Excel,

65001: Unicode (UTF8)

format has to be selected in the Excel import dialog.

Otherwise, national characters will turn out corrupt in Excel.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

385

Language Management

17.6 Importing Languages

After translation or other editing, the updated language file can be imported to the project again.

1. Select

Import

from the

Import/Export

button.

2. Specify location and language selection, and click

OK

.

Parameter

Format

Path

Languages

Import Strategy

Description

Select format of the file to import; text file or Excel file.

Browse to the location of the file to import

Select which languages to import

Selecting

Key

performs the import according to the

Designer

and

Object

columns in the multiple languages configuration page.

Reference Text

performs the import according to the

Text

column. If you have changed the texts of the default language after exporting the languages, it is recommended to select

Key

.

The imported file will also include the default language.

Note:

Make sure to make a backup copy of the project before importing languages, in case there are mismatches between the existing and the imported languages.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

386

Language Management

17.7 Hebrew Language

Hebrew is written from right to left, opposite to the way most modern languages are written.

iX Developer does not support Hebrew keyboards. It is suggested that you write your text entries using a Hebrew font in an external text editor that supports

Hebrew keyboards, then copy the text entry into your iX Developer project.

The

Arial Unicode

is an example of a font that supports the Hebrew language.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

387

Audit Trail

18 Audit Trail

The Audit Trail function makes it possible to track operator actions.

The Audit Trail database can be exported in csv format using the

Database Export

action. It is recommended to use the database export method rather than the backup method.

Related information

Database Export

18.1 Logging Strategies

To meet FDA (Food and Drug Administration) demands, it is possible to log actions in a strict manner. FDA logging implies that no log entries will ever be overwritten. If the size of the audit trail database is close to being exceeded

(approximately 80% of the limit), a notification window will be displayed, where the user is warned, and demanded to export the data. Alternatively, the size of the Audit Trail database can be increased. If the limit of the database is exceeded, the logging is terminated and the operator panel will be blocked for any further operator actions. This is indicated by an error message.

With circular buffering, the oldest log entry is overwritten when the database is full. No warning message is displayed when reaching the limit of the database.

The database can be exported using an action, regardless of logging strategy.

The log entries are saved in the Audit Trail database, and the information can be displayed using the Audit Trail Viewer.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

388

Audit Trail

18.2 Using the Audit Trail Function

The function is enabled by selecting

Audit Trail

from the

Insert

ribbon tab. The configuration page opens in the desktop area. All actions available for logging are listed. It is possible to log all or only some actions. It is also possible to log tag changes only (without logging actions).

Parameter

Log All/Log None

Logging strategy

Max size of database

Description

Click the buttons to quickly select all or no actions from the list

Select FDA or Cyclic Buffering

The maximum size of the Audit Trail database

Value change on tags, performed by user actions, can be logged by selecting

Log to

Audit Trail

in the tags configuration page. This option is enabled only if the audit trail function is activated in the project.

Related information

Others

in

Adding Tags

section

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

389

Audit Trail

18.2.1

Audit Trail Description

It is possible to add a description for each object that is logged to the Audit Trail database using the Property Grid.

The description will be saved to the

Description

column of the Audit Trail database, and is limited to 255 characters.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

390

Audit Trail

18.3 Audit Trail Viewer

The Audit Trail Viewer is selected from the

Objects

group on the Home ribbon tab. It displays the information from the Audit Trail database.

Selecting

Configure Columns

on the

General

tab when the Audit Trail Viewer object is selected makes it possible to choose and configure columns to display in runtime.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

391

Audit Trail

18.4 Audit Trail Export

An audit trail database can be exported as a .csv file and saved to a USB stick, an external memory card or to the project files folder. The export is configured through the

Database Export

action available from the

Database

action group.

Note:

The export will not delete the audit trail log from the project.

Action Groups

Related information

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

392

18.4.1

Audit Trail

Audit Trail Export from an Operator

Panel Target

It is possible to select

export to USB

,

export to external memory card

or

export to the Project Files folder

, and also setting another name of the export file.

It is also possible to select the requested delimiter in the .csv file (comma or semicolon).

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

393

18.4.2

Audit Trail

Audit Trail Export from a PC Target

It is possible to select

Browse and Select an export path

,

Export to Path

or the

Export to Project Files folder

, and also setting another name of the export file.

The

Browse and Select an export path

option allows browsing for desired export destination in runtime. This may be useful if available folders in runtime are unknown when designing the project.

Select the

Export to Path

option when you want to set the path when designing the project. If the pre-defined path is not valid in runtime, the operator may browse the PC environment by clicking a browse button.

It is also possible to select the requested delimiter in the .csv file (comma or semicolon).

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

394

Text Library

19 Text Library

With the text library function, text tables can be created, where values are linked to texts. The text library function can be used for presentation of each sequence step in sequence control. Another possible application is to present error codes, where an analog signal generates error codes connected to texts in a text library.

The function can also be used to give analog values specific values, depending on the selected texts.

The text library function is activated by selecting it from the

Insert

ribbon tab.

Texts and groups can be added from the

Add

button.

It is also possible to add start and end values for each message, that makes the text in the connected object change depending on the value of the tag.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

395

Text Library

19.1 Connecting Objects to Text Library

Texts

Perform the following steps to connect an object to a text library text:

1. Select the object on the screen.

2. Click on

General

on the Dynamics tab.

3. Select the

Text

property, and select

Text Library Group Converter

.

4. Browse to the tag and select the text library group.

The object will now present the texts from the text library instead of the value.

19.2 Exporting and Importing Text

Library Texts

The texts in the text library can be exported and imported using the

Import/Export

button in the Text library configuration page. The procedure is similar to exporting and importing tags.

Related information

Importing and Exporting Tags

Tag Import Example

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

396

Database Export

20 Database Export

Some databases in the project can be exported as a .csv file to a USB stick, an external memory card or to the project files folder. The following databases are available for csv export: alarm server, audit trail, data logger and trend viewer.

Database export is not supported during project simulation.

20.1 Setting up Database Export

The export is triggered via an action,

Database Export

, in the

Database

group.

Individual database tables may be selected for export by clicking the + sign.

The default properties for the database export is exporting the database to the project files folder with the name as given in the project.

Note:

To facilitate exporting multiple databases at once, configuring multiple actions is recommended.

Clicking the

...

button next to the selected database opens a dialog from which the default database export properties may be altered.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

397

20.1.1

Database Export

Database Export from Operator

Panel Target

It is possible to select export to USB stick or external memory card, and also setting another name of the export file. Leaving the

Overwrite

box unchecked adds date and time to the export file name, thus avoiding overwriting an existing export file.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

398

20.1.2

Database Export

Database Export from PC Target

It is possible to set another name of the export file. Leaving the

Overwrite

box unchecked adds date and time to the export file name, thus avoiding overwriting an existing export file.

The

Browse and Select an Export Path

option allows browsing for desired export destination in runtime. This may be useful if available folders in runtime are unknown when designing the project.

Select the

Export to Path

option when you want to set the path when designing the project. If the pre-defined path is not valid in runtime, the operator may browse the PC environment by clicking a browse button.

Related information

Actions Ribbon Tab

Simulate

Multiple Actions

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

399

21

Operator Panel System Software

Operator Panel System

Software

In the operator panel, there is a system program (operating system), which is stored in the operator panel’s memory on delivery.

The system program can be replaced, that is, updated to a newer version, either via

PC or via external memory card.

An Image Loader is used to download system programs to the operator panel via a

PC. The Image Loader is available from the web site.

Note:

When updating an operator panel, it is important to ensure that power is not interrupted during the transfer.

21.1 Welcome Screen

•

•

•

When the operator panel is started, the welcome screen is displayed. The following items about the operator panel are listed:

Size of internal memory card, if applicable

IP address

Image version

If there is a project in the panel, it will be loaded automatically.

If there is no project in the panel, touching the screen will display the Service menu.

Related information

Service Menu

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

400

Operator Panel System Software

21.2 Service Menu

The service menu for the operator panel can be accessed before a project is downloaded, or by setting the mode switches in mode 1000. The location of the mode switches is described in the installation manual for the operator panel.

21.2.1

Service Menu in an Empty Panel

•

When no project is loaded in the panel memory, the panel will boot, displaying the

Welcome screen.

Press anywhere on the panel display to enter the service menu.

21.2.2

Service Menu in TxA/TxB Panels

Perform the following steps to enter the service menu:

1. Apply power to the panel.

2. When the hourglass picture appears, press a finger on the screen and hold for approximately 20 seconds.

3. If the service menu is password protected, you will be prompted for a pin code.

Enter pin code.

4. The touch calibration screen will display the following message:

“Tap anywhere on screen or touch calibrate will start in 10 seconds.”

5. Press finger once again to enter the service menu.

21.2.3

When a project is loaded in the panel memory, the panel will automatically start to execute the project. To display the service menu at boot-up:

1. Disconnect the power supply from the panel.

2. Set the mode switches in mode 1000 (Service Menu mode).

3. Connect the power supply.

When the panel boots up it will suggest to go into the

Touch Calibrate

mode.

This ensures that it will be possible to recover from a bad calibration.

4. Press anywhere on the panel display to interrupt the timer and to enter the service menu.

5. Make desired settings in the service menu.

6. Disconnect the power supply from the panel.

7. Set the mode switches in mode 0000 (Run mode).

8. Reconnect the power supply.

Related information

Service Menu Group

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

401

Operator Panel System Software

21.2.4

IP Settings

Service Menu Options

Select to obtain an IP address automatically via DHCP, or specify an IP address.

The IP address can also be set during project transfer.

For panels with two Ethernet ports, select port according to the illustration below.

Port 1 Port 2

The port that is currently connected is recognized by a *.

Date/Time

Use the

Date/Time Settings

dialog to set the time zone, date and time for the panel.

Erase Project

The erase function will detect if the project is located in the panel memory or on a memory card. Pressing

Erase Project

will completely remove the project and all its components from the panel memory/the memory card.

Format Memory Card (for Some Models)

The format memory card function will detect if external and internal memory cards. Select which card to format and, in some cases, formatting alternatives.

Touch Calibrate

Select

Touch Calibrate

if the touch screen needs to be calibrated. Follow the instructions on the screen to perform a calibration.

Close

Press

Close

to exit the service menu.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

402

Operator Panel System Software

21.3 Operator Panel Upgrade

The operator panel can be upgraded using the Image Loader application, and setting the mode switches in mode 0100. The location of the mode switches is described in the installation manual for the operator panel.

21.3.1

Requirements

•

•

•

•

Updating of the operator panel system program requires the following:

A PC with Image Loader application.

An Ethernet connection between the PC and the operator panel.

The operator panel IP address.

The Image file from the web site.

21.3.2

Transfer Image

1. Double-click on the executable Image Loader file to start the transfer program.

2. Follow the instructions.

Transfer Procedure

The image transfer procedure is completely menu-driven. The operator panel will be ready for transfer directly afterwards, provided that all steps are performed and completed.

The following steps outline the transfer procedure:

1. Disconnect the power supply from the panel.

2. Set the mode switches in mode 0100 (Image Load mode).

3. Reconnect the power supply.

4. Select the operator panel to upgrade by entering its IP address.

5. Click

Upgrade

.

6. When the upgrade is finished, disconnect power from the operator panel.

7. Set the mode switches in mode 0000 (Run mode).

8. Reconnect power to the operator panel.

Note:

When updating an operator panel, it is important to ensure that power is not interrupted during the transfer.

Transfer procedure in TxA/TxB Panels

The image transfer procedure is completely menu-driven. The operator panel will be ready for transfer directly afterwards, provided that all steps are performed and completed.

The following steps outline the transfer procedure:

1. Disconnect the power supply from the panel.

2. Press a finger on the screen and apply power

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

403

Operator Panel System Software

3. Select the operator panel to upgrade by entering its IP address.

4. Click

Upgrade

.

5. When the upgrade is finished, disconnect power from the operator panel.

6. Reconnect power to the operator panel.

Note:

When updating an operator panel, it is important to ensure that power is not interrupted during the transfer.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

404

Multiple Controllers

22 Multiple Controllers

It is possible to use multiple drivers with one operator panel. This means that the operator panel can communicate with different controllers simultaneously. The controllers can be connected to the serial ports on the operator panel and via the

Ethernet port.

Note:

If the same tag is connected to addresses in more than one active controller, there is no way to control from which controller the value is read in runtime.

22.1 Adding a Controller

Click on

Tags

in the Project Explorer, select the

Controller

tab and click

Add

to add a new controller in the current project, and select which controller model and driver that is to be used.

Tags are added and controller is selected on the Tags tab.

Adding a Controller

Related information

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

405

Multiple Controllers

22.1.1

Addressing

Addressing of the tags in the controllers is carried out according to the help file for each driver.

When assigning a tag to an object, all tags, regardless of controller connection, are available for selection.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

406

Multiple Controllers

22.1.2

Examples

The following examples show configurations where multiple drivers are used in the operator panel.

Operator panel communicating with one controller and one frequency converter.

Operator panel communicating in series with one controller via the Ethernet and with controllers of another make.

Operator panel communicating with two controllers of different makes via the

Ethernet.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

407

Trouble Shooting

23 Trouble Shooting

This section describes tools to use in case of unexpected behavior in iX Developer.

23.1 Project Build Failure

If project build fails, check that the absolute path to the project, including its components, does not exceed 260 characters.

23.2 Backup Project Issues

Make sure that project that is fetched using the Backup command is identical to the current iX Developer project; i.e. has the same name and is of the same size.

Related information

Upload Database

23.3 Invalid Names

If using system device names when naming objects such as controllers, screens, recipe managers, data loggers and script modules, an error message will be displayed, stating that this is an invalid name. Examples of system device names:

AUX, COM1, CON, LPT3, NUL, PRN.

Related information

Name Group

23.4 Adobe Reader not Recognized

In order for the PDF Viewer object to recognize that Adobe Reader is installed in the development PC as well as in the target, the setting

Display PDF in browser

has to be enabled in Adobe Reader.

1. Open Adobe Reader and select

Edit/Preferences/Internet

.

2. Check the

Display PDF in browser

box.

23.5 Expression Cannot Be Found

If an error indicating that an expression cannot be found is generated at project validation, make sure that objects inserted from the Component library uses global expressions only.

Related information

Using Expressions

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

408

Trouble Shooting

When designing iX Developer projects, the CPU load may suddenly increase when performing actions such as moving objects on the screen or hovering over buttons, depending on which graphic card is used.

This problem may be solved by adjusting the hardware acceleration of the graphic card.

In Windows XP, follow the steps below to make needed adjustments:

1. Double-click on the

Display

icon in the Windows control panel.

2. Select the

Settings

tab and click on the

Advanced

button.

3. Select the

Troubleshoot

tab and decrease or turn off the hardware acceleration by dragging the slider.

Related information

System Requirements and Limitations

23.7 Error Related to Third Party

Controls

When opening a project including third party controls, the third party controls have to be included in the iX Developer third party control folder. Otherwise the project may terminate, or unexpected error messages may be displayed.

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

409

Trouble Shooting

If you are working with a large iX Developer project, especially a project with many tags and alarms, you may find that navigating the script tree view is slow.

The performance can be improved by saving the project.

Related information

Script

Beijer Electronics, MAEN831H

410

Head office

Beijer Electronics AB

Box 426

201 24 Malmö, Sweden www.beijerelectronics.com / +46 40 358600